JP2020198915A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the amusement in a special state.SOLUTION: When the game state is controlled to a high probability/second KT state, a game machine determinately stops a specific pattern 18TM050 on a pattern display area 5C in a case where the performance mode is the cloudy mode when the variable display result of the second special pattern becomes "small winning", determinately stops the combination of ornament patterns having the order of odd number patterns in pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the case where the performance mode is the rainy mode, and determinately stops the combination of the ornament patterns overlapped with an effect image 18TM060 in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the case where the performance mode is the typhoon mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-3

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes advantageous for the player who is likely to win a prize, or becomes advantageous for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If it is done, a "big hit" will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, a symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left middle right symbols) continues for a predetermined time and stops and shakes in a state that matches a specific display result. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

Some such game machines are configured to be controllable in a special state that is different from the advantageous state. For example, as shown in Patent Document 1, it is possible to perform a small hit game in which the large winning opening is opened in a predetermined pattern, and a game in which a determination result of whether or not to perform a small hit game is notified by an effect symbol. A machine has been proposed.

JP-A-2018-33787 (Fig. 18)

With respect to a game machine that can be controlled to a special state as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

The game machine of means A1
A game state control means (CPU103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (CPU120 for effect control) for controlling an effect are provided, and a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and a player rather than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values (for example, 4 to 6) that are highly advantageous to the pachinko machine.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state (high accuracy / second KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state. And can be controlled,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
In the special state (high accuracy / second KT state), a plurality of types of production modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) are selected based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player). It is possible to control to one of the production modes,
It is possible to make the predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state different depending on the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode. Stops confirming the special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol with the letters "OPEN" on the elliptical object) in the symbol display area 5C when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit". As shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the effect mode is the rain mode, the symbol is displayed when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit". The combination of decorative symbols (“135” in this example), which is the order of odd-numbered symbols, is fixedly stopped in the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3). , When the effect mode is typhoon mode, the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, the note type) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit". The combination of decorative patterns with the image) superimposed is stopped),
further,
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14) and
A suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means is included as an embodiment including a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). A suggestion effect executing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) that can be executed in a mode that does not exist.
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in -21 (B), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3. Infeasible part),
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in -21 (C) to 15-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out of alignment, The part where the cut-in effect can be performed with the pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern (super that executes the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 15-6) is notified that the suggestion effect is controlled after it is once suggested that the advantage state is not controlled. It has a variation pattern of reach γ jackpot (PB1-5)),
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific effect is higher than the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect not including the specific effect. Low (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the revival effect is executed. No Super Reach γ The part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the effect mode can be selected by the action of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state. In addition, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the advantageous state is set in the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that it is controlled, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1 and
A variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display) is provided.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information according to the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2)). In the cloudy mode, a number symbol ("0" to "9" in this example) and a special symbol 18TM050 (a small hit symbol with the letters "OPEN" shown on an oval object) are used as decorative symbols. When the effect mode is the rain mode and the typhoon mode, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B2) and 11-5 (C2), a number symbol (in this example) is displayed as a decorative symbol. , "0" to "9") variable display)
A game machine characterized by that.
It is possible to change the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information according to the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
It is equipped with a variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) that can execute variable display (variable display of decorative symbols, variable display of small symbols).
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) has a variable display of the first decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) and a variable display of the second decorative identification information (small), which is less visible than the first decorative identification information. (Variable display of design) and
The mode of variable display of the second decorative identification information is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the second small symbol is a number symbol of "0" to "9" regardless of the effect mode. The area where the second small symbol is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the effect mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of variable display of the second decoration identification information can be shared regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the effect mode is switched. It becomes possible.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
A variable display means (CPU103) capable of performing variable display (variable display of a special symbol) and
A hold display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the number of hold displays (first hold storage number, second hold storage number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable display of special symbols) that have not been executed. Prepare,
The mode of the number of reserved displays is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the mode of displaying the number of first reserved storages and the mode of displaying the number of second reserved storages are any of the effect modes. The first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which effect mode is controlled.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the number of hold displays can be standardized regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the number of hold displays even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
A variable display means (CPU103) capable of executing variable display (variable display) is provided.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is used for the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed). Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, as shown by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the [Cloudy mode] is switched to the [Typhoon mode] and the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the [Typhoon mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. ] Is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), so the production mode is changed from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been edited)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the movement of the player during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect mode.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the effect mode based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) in the advantageous state (big hit game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect mode controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is cloudy mode and rain. It is possible to select from either mode or typhoon mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the effect mode can be selected by the action of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the effect mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, FIG. 11-11). As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high is displayed at the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the certain / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. If this is the case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the image display device 5 is controlled when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, a special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to identify the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a game value display corresponding to the given game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in the above, regardless of which production mode is controlled, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the game value display can be shared in each effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the game value display even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
A variable display means (CPU103) capable of performing variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Prepare,
In the special state (high accuracy / second KT state), the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) variably displays the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (the first special symbol). It is possible to execute a specific response effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to (variable display),
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of the specific corresponding effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling an effect.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state (high accuracy / second KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state. And can be controlled,
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
Corresponding effect (variable display of decorative symbol) corresponding to variable display (variable display of special symbol) can be executed.
Based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) in the special state (high accuracy / second KT state), a plurality of types of effect modes (symbol display area 5L) having different modes of the corresponding effect In 5, 5C and 5R, the variation between the number symbol ("0" to "9" in this example) and the special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol with the letters "OPEN" shown on the elliptical object) as decorative symbols. Of the cloudy mode in which the display is performed, the rain mode and the typhoon mode in which the number symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") are variablely displayed as decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It can be controlled to either production mode,
When changing the effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that reduces the visibility of the corresponding effect (as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the effect mode change effect is performed. By superimposing the mode change image 18TM310, which is executed and shows the characters "mode CHANGE" on the full screen of the image display device 5, the display mode changes before and after the effect mode is changed. The visibility of the display is reduced)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when changing to the effect mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the different modes of the corresponding effect.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the corresponding effect, variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative design) can be executed.
The mode of variable display of the decoration identification information differs depending on the effect mode (when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the number symbols as decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (in this example, "0"). ”To“ 9 ”) and the special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol with the letters“ OPEN ”indicated on the elliptical object) are displayed in a variable manner, and when the effect mode is rain mode or typhoon mode. , In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the number symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") are variablely displayed as decorative symbols).
A game machine characterized by that.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
As the corresponding effect, the variable display of the first decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) and the variable display of the second decorative identification information (variable display of the small symbol), which is less visible than the first decorative identification information, are displayed. Feasible and
The mode of variable display of the second decorative identification information is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the second small symbol is a number symbol of "0" to "9" regardless of the effect mode. The area where the second small symbol is displayed is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 regardless of the effect mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of variable display of the second decoration identification information can be shared regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the second decoration identification information even if the effect mode is switched. It becomes possible.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
It is provided with a hold display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the number of hold displays (first hold storage number, second hold storage number) corresponding to the number of variable displays (variable display) that have not been executed.
The mode of the number of reserved displays is common regardless of the effect mode (as shown in FIG. 11-2, the mode of displaying the number of first reserved storages and the mode of displaying the number of second reserved storages are any of the effect modes. The first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are common regardless of which effect mode is controlled.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the mode of the number of hold displays can be standardized regardless of the effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the number of hold displays even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is used for the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) during the variable display (during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed). Based on this, it is possible to change the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, as shown by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. At the timing when the [Cloudy mode] is switched to the [Typhoon mode] and the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the [Typhoon mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. ] Is different from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode), so the production mode is changed from the currently controlled production mode (cloudy mode) to the production mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the production mode selection icon 18TM300. has been edited)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the movement of the player during the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game with respect to the effect mode.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can change the effect mode based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) in the advantageous state (big hit game state). (As shown in FIG. 11-7, in the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6), the effect mode controlled after the end of the jackpot game state is cloudy mode and rain. It is possible to select from either mode or typhoon mode)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, the effect mode can be selected by the action of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display corresponding to the special state regardless of the effect mode (when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, FIG. 11-11). As shown in (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high is displayed at the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the certain / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed, the production mode is changed, and the typhoon mode is selected as the production mode. If this is the case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the image display device 5 is controlled when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen, a special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to identify the special state regardless of the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can display a game value display corresponding to the given game value regardless of the effect mode (FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5). As shown in the above, regardless of which production mode is controlled, the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the game value display can be shared in each effect mode, so that the player can accurately grasp the game value display even if the effect mode is switched. ..

The game machine of means B9
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
The game state control means can execute the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Yes,
In the special state (high accuracy / second KT state), the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) variably displays the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (the first special symbol). It is possible to execute a specific response effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to (variable display),
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of the specific corresponding effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a game state control means (CPU 103) for controlling a game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling an effect.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
An advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and a gaming state that is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, and the game value is determined by the special state. Can be controlled into a special state (high accuracy / second KT state) in which is likely to be given, and a predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT state) that is a gaming state controlled after the end of the advantageous state and is different from the special state. And
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
A common predetermined display ("cloudy" as a background image) when controlled to the special state (high accuracy / second KT state) and when controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT state). "Image", "rain image", and "typhoon image") can be displayed,
When controlled to the special state (high accuracy / second KT state), the special display corresponding to the special state (special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH") can be displayed. A game machine to play.
The predetermined display can be shared between the special state and the predetermined state, and the special state and the predetermined display can be specified by the special display, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

The game machine of means C2
It is a game machine of means C1
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to control to one of multiple production modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode).
It is possible to control a common effect mode when it is controlled to the special state (high accuracy / second KT state) and when it is controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT state) (FIG. As shown in 11-2, as a common effect mode regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be a high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It can be controlled to the cloudy mode, and even when it is controlled to either the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), rain is a common effect mode. The mode can be controlled, and the typhoon mode is a common effect mode regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) or high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Is controllable)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to control a common effect mode depending on whether the player is controlled to the special state or the predetermined state, and the material of the effect mode is common regardless of the game state. It is possible to reduce the development cost.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2.
The game state control means (CPU103) is
Depending on the type of the advantageous state (6R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot), the game state is controlled to either the special state or the predetermined state (as shown in FIG. 10-29, [ When [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs, it shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot game, and when [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs. , After the end of the jackpot game, it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state))
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state is controlled to either a special state or a predetermined state according to the type of the advantageous state. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the type of the advantageous state, and the hobby of the production related to the advantageous state. Can be improved.

The game machine of means C4
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C3.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
When controlled to the special state (high accuracy / second KT state) and when controlled to the predetermined state (high accuracy / first KT state), the player's operation (push button 31B by the player) It is possible to control to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes based on the operation) (as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5). The [cloudy mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 displayed on the screen is switched to the [typhoon mode], and when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. Since the [typhoon mode] shown in the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 in is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode), the effect mode is selected from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode). It has been changed to the production mode (typhoon mode) shown on the icon 18TM300)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode based on the movement of the player when the state is controlled to the special state and when the state is controlled to the predetermined state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine of means C5
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C4.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
One of a plurality of types of effect modes based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player) while being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state). (As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3), during the effect mode selection period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6) of the jackpot ending period, after the jackpot gaming state ends. You can select from cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode as the controlled production mode),
The special display can be displayed when it is controlled to the advantageous state (as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), the typhoon mode image of the image display device 5 during the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period. A special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed on the upper right part and the lower left part of the 18TM200C).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily identify that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state is controlled.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C5.
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is controlled to the special state (a RUSH suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit is possible. Is)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when selecting the effect mode.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to means C6.
The game state control means (CPU103) performs a variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and a variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) in parallel. Feasible and
The effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a variable display (first special symbol) of the first specific identification information controlled in the advantageous state (big hit game state) in the special state (high accuracy / second KT state). It is possible to execute a specific response effect (big hit countdown effect) corresponding to the variable display of
A gaming machine characterized in that the mode of the specific corresponding effect (big hit countdown effect) is common regardless of the effect mode.
According to such a configuration, in a special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the specific correspondence effect corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information corresponding to the advantageous state.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-033787 (paragraph 0040,0088), it is possible to execute variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and it is determined that the second special symbol is almost a small hit, and the probability changes. It is described that when the player strikes right in the game state, the small hit game is repeatedly performed. In addition, there is a configuration that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0069, 805,090, FIG. 12) defines a process of controlling the display of an effect based on a set value and displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, or a lion. It is described that it is executed at the timing. By combining the gaming machines described in JP-A-2018-033787 and JP-A-2010-201002, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in a game configured to be controllable in a special state. However, it is not possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game simply by executing the setting suggestion effect in the game configured to be controllable in a special state. Therefore, an object of the invention according to the means D1 to the means D7 is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means D1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of playing a game, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. Steps S122 to S125 in the game control microcomputer 100, which is a game machine that can be set to a value and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, are executed. Part) and a special state control means (for example, a part for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state. , A portion for executing steps 052IWS2208, S2210, S2211, S2212, S2213 in the game control microcomputer 100, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which a game value is easily given by the special state. ) And a setting suggestion effect (for example, a small hit winning suggestion effect) that can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through a specific area (for example, a special winning opening). It is characterized by including an execution means (for example, a portion that executes 052IWS323 and S324 in the effect control CPU 120). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

(Means D2) In the means D1, the advantageous state control means can control the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Yes, the special state control means controls a special state (for example, a small hit game state) when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display display result. Display result determination means for determining the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). (For example, a portion for executing steps 026IWS59A, S64A, S59B, S64B in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the determination value is used to determine to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result. The specific judgment value (for example, the judgment value for big hit judgment) and the special judgment value for deciding to derive and display the special display result as the display result of the variable display (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) A setting means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") that are included and have a different number of specific determination values. The portion for executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) in the above is provided, and the number of special determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). According to such a configuration, appropriate playability can be realized.

(Means D3) In the means D1 or the means D2, the setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit during the high probability / second KT state). Based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

(Means D4) In any of means D1 to D3, when controlled in an advantageous state and when controlled in a special state, variable means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7, special variable winning). A variable means capable of controlling the ball device 17) into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball) can easily enter and an easy-to-enter state (for example, a closed state) in which the game medium (for example, a game ball) is difficult or impossible to enter. A control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S122 to S124, S126, S127 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means corresponds to the fact that the variable means is controlled in an easy-to-enter state. , The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, and the game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. Based on this, it may be configured so that a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls can be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

(Means D5) In any one of the means D1 to the means D4, the setting suggestion effect executing means usually switches from the low probability / first KT state at the start or end of the game state (for example, at the start or end of the jackpot game). It is configured so that the setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624) when shifting to the state (low probability / low base state). You may be. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

(Means D6) In any of the means D1 to the means D5, the setting suggestion effect executing means controls the number of times to control the special state in the special state, the total game value given by the special state in the special state, or Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed in the special state, the setting suggestion effect can be executed with different selection ratios (for example, the number of prize balls is 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666). Depending on the arrival of, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios, or, for example, the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state or the high probability / second KT state. Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

(Means D7) In any one of means D1 to D6, the special state control means is disadvantageous to the player as a special state as compared with the advantageous special state (for example, the second KT state) and the advantageous special state. It is possible to control to a disadvantageous special state (for example, the first KT state), and the setting suggestion effect executing means plays a specific area when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and during the disadvantageous special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios depending on when the medium passes (for example, only when the game ball wins a small hit in the special winning opening during the second KT state, it is suggested at the time of the small hit winning. It may be configured to perform an effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the following inventions relating to the gaming machines of means A10 to means A18. Conventionally, in a game machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902, and any setting. There were some that could perform an effect (specific effect) that suggested whether a value was set. In such a game machine, the variable display result was not a big hit (it was not controlled to the advantageous state) because the variable display result was out of order (not controlled to the advantageous state) by executing the specific effect. ) Instead, it is conceivable to notify that the set value set in the game machine is an advantageous set value (advantageous set value) for the player and suppress the deterioration of the game interest. However, there are some gaming machines that can execute an effect (special pattern) that once suggests that the variable display result will be out of order and then notifies that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, in such a game machine, even if it is suggested that the variable display result is out of alignment due to the execution of the specific effect, if it is notified again that the variable display result will be a big hit, the setting value advantageous to the game machine. Although the player recognizes that is set, there is a problem that the game interest is deteriorated due to the recognition being incorrect. In view of this point, the game machine that can reduce the decrease in the game interest is It is required to be provided.

The game machine of means A10
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantageous setting value (for example, that is higher for the player than the disadvantage setting value). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values including 4 to 6).
Determining means that can determine to control to the advantageous state (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14) and
A suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the control is controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means is included as an embodiment including a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-3). A suggestion effect executing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-18 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 7) that can be executed in a mode that does not exist.
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in -21 (B), if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order, the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3. Infeasible part),
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, FIG. 15). As shown in -21 (C) to 15-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display result is out of alignment, The part where the cut-in effect can be performed with the pattern CI-3),
When the suggestion effect is executed, a special pattern (super that executes the resurrection effect shown in FIG. 15-6) is notified that the suggestion effect is controlled after it is once suggested that the advantage state is not controlled. It has a variation pattern of reach γ jackpot (PB1-5)),
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific effect is higher than the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect not including the specific effect. Low (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the revival effect is executed. No Super Reach γ The part where the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is set lower than when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the special pattern is set even though the player recognizes that the advantageous setting value is set. By notifying that the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

The gaming machine of the means A11 is the gaming machine according to the means A10.
The advantageous setting value includes a first advantageous setting value (for example, 4 or 5) and a second advantageous setting value (for example, 6) that is more advantageous for the player than the first advantageous setting value.
When the second advantageous setting value is set, the suggestion effect executing means sets the first advantageous setting value when it is not determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to carry out the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect at a higher rate than when it is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means (for example, FIG. 15-21 (for example, FIG. As shown in C) to FIG. 15-21 (E), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. In that case, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When the set value is 4, the part where the ratio of cut-in effect executed in pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be expected that the second advantageous setting value is set because the specific effect is executed frequently and is not controlled to the advantageous state, so that the game interest is improved. it can.

The gaming machine of the means A12 is the gaming machine according to the means A10 or the means A11.
Regardless of which set value is set, the rate at which the special pattern is executed when it is determined by the determination means to be controlled in the advantageous state is the same (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-13 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is used by the CPU 103 using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Part to determine)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the rate at which the special pattern is executed follows a set value that determines the rate at which it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can pay attention to the special pattern. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of the means A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A12.
A special effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a cut-in effect of pattern CI-4) for notifying that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. Is provided with a portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-18).
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A and jackpot B) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Including
When the special effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, the cut-in effect is controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-4. When executed in, the variable display result is always a big hit and is controlled to the big hit game state of big hit C),
When the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed and controlled to the advantageous state, it is controlled to the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 15-21 and 15-). As shown in 22, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, when the variable display result becomes a big hit, the part controlled to the big hit game state of any one of the big hit A, the big hit B, and the big hit C. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed, and the suggestion effect including the specific effect may be executed and controlled to the second advantageous state, which is advantageous. When the set value is set, the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the decrease in the game interest is reduced when the advantageous state is not controlled.

The gaming machine of the means A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A13.
The suggestion effect execution means is similar to the specific effect in addition to the first suggestion effect (for example, the reach effect of the super reach γ) that can be executed in the mode including the specific effect and the mode not including the specific effect. A second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach δ) that can be executed in a mode including an effect (for example, a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight) can be executed as the suggestion effect.
When the second suggestion effect is executed, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ. If so, the part where the variable display result is a big hit)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the variation of the suggestion effect increases, it is noticed whether or not the suggestion effect to be executed is the second suggestion effect in which the same effect as the specific effect is executed and controlled in an advantageous state. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A14.
When the suggestion effect execution means is controlled to the advantageous state by the special pattern, the suggestion effect execution means does not execute the suggestion effect in an aspect including the specific effect (for example, FIG. 15-33 (A) as a modification 208SG-1. )-As shown in FIGS. 15-33 (E), when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-5) in which the revival effect is executed, the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the pattern CI-3. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, as a special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to being notified that the game is controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A15.
As a predetermined effect (for example, a notice effect) that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the first predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) and the said. A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a second predetermined effect (for example, pattern YE-3) suggesting that the first predetermined effect is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate is shown in the figure. The portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the advance notice effect determination process shown in 15-25) is provided.
When the predetermined effect executing means is set to the advantageous set value and it is not determined by the determination means that the predetermined effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the cut is performed. If it is decided to execute the in-effect in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 with a high expectation of a big hit are excluded when executing the advance notice effect. The production pattern is determined from the production patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's expectation that the specific effect and the second predetermined effect are controlled to the advantageous state is excessively increased even though the specific effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. Can be prevented.

The gaming machine of the means A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A16.
A special effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a notice effect of pattern YE-4) for notifying that the effect is different from the specific effect and is controlled to the advantageous state. A portion that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7 after executing the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-25)
The special effect executing means limits the execution of the special effect when the suggestive effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed when controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-26 (A)). As shown in, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is executed. In this case, the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being recognized in advance that the special effect is controlled to the advantageous state by executing the special effect when the specific effect is executed, so that the control to the advantageous state is performed. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of the means A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A10 to the means A17.
As gaming states different from the advantageous state, a first gaming state (for example, a low probability low base state and a low probability high base state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). It is provided with a game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 14) that can be controlled by (high accuracy and high base state).
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect in the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-13 and 15-14, the CPU 103 is in the gaming state. Regardless of the fluctuation pattern of super reach selectable part),
When the advantageous setting value is set and the determination means has not determined that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed in the second gaming state. The ratio is higher than the ratio at which the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed in the first game state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). When the value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced in the high accuracy and high base state. Is set higher than the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 in the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second gaming state, the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect not controlled by the advantageous state indicating that the advantageous set value is set is more likely to be executed than in the first game state. The interest of the second game state can be improved.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special variable winning ball device in the feature part 052IW. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like in the feature part 052IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in the KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is the flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character control normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how of transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of over winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect decision table at the time of over winning. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect processing at the time of a small hit prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of a small hit prize. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the prize ball number emphasis effect decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the process of waiting for a variable display start. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating display mode of right-handed notification. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 2. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control of the variation display when a small hit is made in the variation display of the other special symbol during execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation processing in modification 4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display in a low probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display in a high probability state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in a cloudy mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in a rain mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding various productions in a typhoon mode. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in a big hit game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in a jackpot game state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in a high accuracy / 1st KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in a high accuracy / first KT state. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in a high accuracy / 2nd KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in a high accuracy / 2nd KT state. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the cut-in effect pattern CI-3. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the notice production execution period for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the advance notice effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 208SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 208SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 208SG-7.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening, so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched (so-called left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot win a prize. The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control is executed so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state of being moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is executed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control that opens the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed so as to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the large winning opening is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area and launches (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) as a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and may be configured to be a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "normal figure hit" in the normal figure game. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the game is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). When the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the first special symbol game are realized (details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). When the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, the execution and hold management of the second special symbol game are realized. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process (step S25C). When the CPU 103 executes the accessory control process process for each timer interrupt, it is possible to control the big hit game state, the small hit game state, the game state, and the like (details will be described later).

Following the accessory control process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is controlled by the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S113A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S113A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first variation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of variation patterns are set using random values for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes processing to decide which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation processing ends. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may result in a small hit and be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the first special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control, and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, regarding the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the setting process for starting the big hit game is performed. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", a process for starting the small hit game is performed. Then, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. In addition, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is before the small hit is released. (Determine whether or not the value corresponds to the processing to the small hit end processing), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag is not changed from the value corresponding to the second special symbol variation processing. As a result, the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process unless the small hit game is in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25C shown in FIG. 4 as the accessory control process process. In this accessory control process process, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S120 to S128 according to the value of the accessory control process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S120 to S128) of the accessory control process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The bonus control normal process in step S120 is executed when the value of the bonus control process flag is “0”. In this bonus control normal process, it is monitored whether or not the setting for starting the big hit game is made, and if the setting for starting the big hit game is made, the process for starting the big hit game is performed. , The value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "1".

The gate passage waiting process in step S121 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “1”. In this gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "2".

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S122 is executed when the accessory control process flag is “2”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S123 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “3”. This big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "4" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. , End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S124 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “4”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "3", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit execution number, the accessory control process The value of the flag is updated to "5". When the value of the accessory control process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end processing in step S125 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “5”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S126 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “6”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "7", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S127 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “7”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "8", and the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S128 is executed when the value of the accessory control process flag is “8”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Controls such as operation to operate various production devices are performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 9-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 9-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 9-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided with various prize information related to winning. It also has a function to display. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

In addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal are incorporated into the main board 11 to capture the game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various winning information such as the continuous ratio and the winning ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these winning information are displayed. This makes it possible to check various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for this purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, a clerk of the game hall or the like determines each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. The operating voltage of is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the sensor are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control computer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is awarded, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball burnout LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 9-3.

A microcomputer for controlling the card unit is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050 according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest ball output rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the ball output rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is.

9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result judgment table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than when the numbers are "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even when is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is the target of the variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to 9-4 to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 9-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 9-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 9-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 9-5 (4), when the setting value specified by the setting command is "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 9-5 (2), and FIG. 9-. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 30%).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
9-6 to 9-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and six levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, so that the game control microcomputer 100 side. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination processing of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), provided that the setting value is changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. Since it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value in such a state, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the data check in the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010) is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the normal value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 performs a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the letter "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if any of the cases (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. It is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as a regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the display of the current set value (step S21TM4550) and the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag, which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output processing when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. The value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in response to the end of the control of any of the modes. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether the mode is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping the above, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the setting confirmation mode end when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2). It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the timing is 30 sec after the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or whether the initialization process is executed and controlled to the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored, the security signal is output for 4 minutes.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unknown whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to this mode and is the first after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is directly imaged. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the recovery from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process).

As shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each total for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt processing described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process processing is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the setting change mode ends is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Without), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). It is possible to control from S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and a security signal is output in response to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (the game control timer interrupt process is executed), and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when an interrupt occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Is notified to prompt the user to perform (determine the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode ") will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is displayed. It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the setting changeover switch operation command to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite this, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended and the normal game processing has started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period when the normal game processing (game control timer interrupt processing) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the processing shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting change mode is entered based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 9-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned ON may be performed. good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and 9-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to surely control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-12. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the setting value "0" stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read setting value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" is stored in the set value storage area after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 9-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, if the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the amusement park terminates the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the setting value is changed during the setting change mode and the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends). This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the operation of turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. At the time of turning on the power, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (1) and 9-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

The memory control of the set value shown in FIG. 9-12 is not limited. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It becomes a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set values (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the game machine of a control state related to the setting.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). When the setting confirmation mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses, and when the setting change mode ends, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
An initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150) is provided.
The initialization means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting is changed. When the mode is controlled, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output is different between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting changing flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). It is characterized in that it is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the game machine is performed without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). The specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied) capable of executing error notification. ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
In the setting change mode control means, the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (at the time of power-on, all steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and the setting value is appropriately set while avoiding unnecessary error notification. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to switch to the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. It is characterized by automatically controlling to the setting change mode).
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
When the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

(Explanation of feature part 052IW)
Next, the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature unit 052IW, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When controlled, when controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if the above occurs, there are very few cases where the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and a high base state is controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes long. Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled so that a small hit is likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. When the first special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is low, whereas when the second special symbol fluctuates, the proportion determined as a small hit is high (however, it will be described later). (Except for the case of forced loss), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

The configuration for setting the KT state to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state is the same as in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state, and the KT state is set to the normal state. It may be in a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

Further, the feature unit 052IW is configured so that the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation position of the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the nail group forming the flow path of the game ball. Although details will be described later, the feature unit 052IW has a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to the open state based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41, and the game ball passes in the first KT state described later. The time from passing through the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passing gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the time required for the game to be played, when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state when one game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the first KT state, the one The game ball can be directly entered into the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the feature unit 052IW. As shown in FIG. 10-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 052IW108 formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the bottom surface member 052IW108 is provided in the jackpot game state. By moving the bottom member 052IW108 backward from the closed state where it is moved forward toward the front, the large winning opening which is the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23.

In the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening is further guided to the guidance path 052IW100 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 7. The guidance path 052IW100 is further branched into two paths 052IW102,103, and the game ball guided to the guidance path 052IW100 is guided to the left side path 052IW102 or the right side path 052IW103. When guided to the left path 052IW102, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 and is detected by the V region switch 052IW106. When guided to the right path 052IW103, the game ball enters the discharge area 052IW105 and is detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107.

As shown in FIG. 10-1, a V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 052IW102, and when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the open state, a game guided to the guidance path 052IW100. The ball can enter the left path 052IW102 and enter the V region 052IW104. Further, when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is in the closed state, the game ball guided by the guidance path 052IW100 enters the right path 052IW103 and is discharged from the discharge area 052IW105 to the back side of the game area.

The V-region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled from the closed state to the open state by driving the solenoid 052IW109 by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103).

Further, in the present feature unit 052IW, when controlled by the big hit game, the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 during the big hit game, and on the condition that it is detected by the V area switch 052IW106, after the big hit game is completed. It is controlled to a probabilistic state.

The total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round matches the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It should be. Therefore, the total number of game balls detected by the V area switch 052IW106 and the number of game balls detected by the discharge area switch 052IW107 during one round does not match the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. In this case, it may be determined that a large winning opening / discharge mismatch error is made, and the error may be notified. In this case, since it takes some time for the winning game ball to reach the V region 052IW104 and the discharge region 052IW105 immediately before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state. If the number of game balls does not match by the time when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it may be configured to determine a large winning opening entry / discharge mismatch error.

(Structure of control board)
FIG. 10-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like in the feature unit 052IW. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the switch circuit 110 includes a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch (first count switch). In addition to the detection signals from the 23 and the second count switch 24)), the detection signals from the V area switch 052IW106 and the discharge area switch 052IW107 are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-2, the solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory and the prize-winning door. In addition to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening, transmission is performed to the solenoid 052IW109 for the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
10-3 and 10-4 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 10-3 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 10-4 shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. In the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability changing state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. As shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) and 10-3 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

Next, the jackpot probability and the small hit probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4. In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), in the non-probability state (low probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "247/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the overall jackpot winning probability is 10 times higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the case of the set value "6" has the highest jackpot probability "2470/65536". It is expensive and is the most advantageous setting for players.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the non-probability state (low probability). The small hit probability is constant as "62986/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability variation state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is common to the non-probability change state and the probability change state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 10-4), the small hit is compared with the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 10-3). The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for small hit determination when executing the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). As shown in FIGS. 10-4 (A) and 10-4 (B), even when the jackpot probability is configured to be constant while the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value in this way, the missed probability is lost. By making the set values "1" to "6" different, the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, the determination values corresponding to the deviations are included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values "1" to "6" (FIG. 10). As shown in -3 and FIG. 10-4, there is no set value at which the probability of loss is 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation differs depending on the set value (as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, depending on which of the set values "1" to "6". , The probability of loss is different).

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the probability of loss is 0 (that is, a set value that does not include a determination value corresponding to loss). For example, at the set value "6" having the highest advantage (highest jackpot probability), the loss probability may be 0, and the determination value corresponding to the loss may not be included.

Further, not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, there may be a case where the small hit probability is 0 (that is, a judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol (FIG. 10-3), the small hit probability may be uniformly set to 0 so that the judgment value for the small hit is not included. Good.

In addition, in FIG. 10-3 (A), (B) and FIGS. 10-4 (A), (B), the small hit probability is the same between the probabilistic state (high probability state) and the non-probability state (low probability state). Although the off-probability is different, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the jackpot probability is higher than that in the non-probability state (low probability state), so the small hit probability is higher than in the non-probability state (low probability state). It may be lowered to match the probability of loss. Further, even if the set values are different in, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched respectively. As a result, in a game machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6 or a game machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of game machine having a setting change function in 6 stages and a hardware / software configuration. Can be standardized and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type judgment table)
10-5 (A) and 10-5 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to "2R normal jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot" based on the random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to for determining either "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "10R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), in this feature unit 052IW, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", There is a 9% chance that it will be a "10R probability variation jackpot", a 56% chance that it will be a "6R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% chance that it will be a "6R normal jackpot". Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be a "10R probability variation jackpot" with a 10% probability, a "6R probability variation jackpot" with a 50% probability, a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 5% probability, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" with a 35% probability. 2R normal jackpot "is determined.

The "10R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 16 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In this feature unit 052IW, when "10R probability variation jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", and "6R normal jackpot" are obtained, a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) elapses in each round of the jackpot game. The large winning openings are controlled to be open until a fixed number of game balls (10 in this example) are won, and a maximum of 10 large winning openings can be won in each round. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variation big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be open only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of winnings to the large winning openings that can be won in each round is about 2 to 3.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state, or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. The method of transitioning the gaming state after the jackpot game will be described later (see FIG. 10-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
10-6 (A) and 10-6 (B) are explanatory views showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol, the small hit type is set to "small hit A" or "small hit B" based on the random number for determining the hit type. , Or a table referenced to determine either "small hit C".

As shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), in the feature unit 052IW, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6", It is determined as "small hit A" with a 100% probability. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), in the feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6". Is determined to be "small hit B" with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be "small hit C" with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-12), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect a game ball to win a special prize inside. In the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-13), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 10-14), and the game ball wins the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected most.

(Variation pattern table)
10-7 to 10-9 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the feature portion 052IW. The EXT shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, if it is in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), it is shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol shown for KT is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 10-8 (C). The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Further, when the small hit is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this feature unit 052IW, even in the non-KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, a situation occurs in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening. I will end up. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is made extremely long and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is executed. By lowering the number of small hits, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state. In the feature unit 052IW, the "frequency of small hits" is, for example, the rate of occurrence of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence of is higher than the normal state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning a prize in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-8 (D) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Will be decided.

As shown in FIG. 10-8 (D), when it is determined that the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state is out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 04 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds is used. It is determined. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit is the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 05 (opening of the second start winning opening), which is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as a small hit. It is determined by the fluctuation pattern for preparation). In this feature unit 052IW, as already described, when controlled to the first KT state, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 17 is controlled in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 can be used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has elapsed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when the big hit is determined as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, if the variation display of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / 1st KT and the 2nd to 49th fluctuations shown in E) is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to be either. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (E), when it is determined that the fluctuation time is out of the range of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # It may be determined to be 07 or the second fluctuation pattern # 08 of the shortened fluctuation whose fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation, and the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 07 and # 10 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 08 and # 11 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

In addition, the 50th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 50th variation shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Will be decided.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “during chance time”. As shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation in the low probability / first KT state is a miss or a small hit, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "chance time is over !!". It is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 14 or the second fluctuation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, a character display such as "chance time ends !!" is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 is determined with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed.

In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIG. 10-7, when a big hit is made in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is displayed. It is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is set to a long fluctuation time, Since the change of the second special symbol executed during the big hit change of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced loss, the forced loss occurs frequently even in the second KT state, and the player makes a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from this. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol to a short fluctuation time, it shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced loss occurs frequently. It is configured.

In addition, unlike the present feature unit 052IW, even if the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is not forcibly missed (for example, the first). If the game machine has a configuration in which the second special symbol is forcibly removed when the second special symbol is changing when the special symbol jackpot symbol is stopped), the fluctuation time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that a small hit can occur at least a plurality of times. (For example, 1 minute) is configured to be secured.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed. Select the variation pattern table according to the number of times. In this case, if the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is to be executed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 10-9 (G) is selected and fluctuates. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, any one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Will be decided.

As in the case of the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), the fluctuation time is also determined to be out of the first fluctuation in the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 17 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 5 seconds. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation in the high probability / first KT state is out of alignment, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Further, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (G), when the jackpot is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is completed, the high shown in FIG. 10-9 (H). Probability / The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the first KT and the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # 22 to # 28 Is decided.

As in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (H), when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state are out of order, as shown in FIG. The second fluctuation pattern # 22 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 23 of the shortened fluctuation with a shorter fluctuation time of 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state are out of order, the second fluctuation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is shortened to 5 seconds, the second fluctuation pattern # 25, and the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second. It may be determined by the second fluctuation pattern # 26 of the fluctuation. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second variation patterns # 22 and # 25 are variation patterns that can be selected only when the second hold memory is not stored, and the second variation patterns # 23 and # 26 store one or more second hold memories. It is a variation pattern that can be selected only when it is present. As a result, the reserved memory is quickly digested and the operating rate is increased. Further, when the jackpot is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-9 (I), when the deviation is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 29 of the shortened fluctuation with a short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of the normal fluctuation of 5 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined to be out of the high probability / second KT state, it may be determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 31 with reach. Further, when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the fluctuation time is determined to be the second fluctuation pattern # 32 of the shortened fluctuation as short as 1.5 seconds, or the fluctuation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of the fluctuation may be determined. Further, when the jackpot is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second fluctuation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, it depends on which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the variation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on a random number for determining the variation pattern, and which variation pattern is used is determined. FIG. 10-10 is for determining the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the fluctuation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 10-9 (I). It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variation display which is a small hit is executed, the variation display is executed. , Regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the second fluctuation pattern # 32 is determined with a probability of 70%, and the second fluctuation pattern # 33 is determined with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is selected.

In addition, in FIG. 10-10, as an example, a variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown, but FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9 show. The other variation pattern tables shown are also configured in the same manner, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6".

In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-8 to 10-10, a shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is performed with a high probability in the case of the second KT state. It shows the case where it is configured to be executed in, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

(Opening pattern of special variable winning ball device 7)
Next, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 will be described. FIG. 10-11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7. First, using FIG. 10-11 (1), a special variable winning ball when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as "probability variation jackpot"). The opening pattern of the device 7 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), when the winning of the second game ball to the jackpot is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The area opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the game ball can enter the V area 052IW104. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), special When the variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed, the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is also controlled to be closed.

When the game ball enters the V area 052IW104 and is detected by the V area switch 052IW106 within a predetermined detection valid period, the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is started at the timing when the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be in the open state, and the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 It is set as the period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses after being controlled to be closed again.

Next, using FIG. 10-11 (2), opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 when controlled by a jackpot game based on a 6R normal jackpot and a 2R normal jackpot (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “normal jackpot”). The pattern will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the first round of the big hit game is started, the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is driven, and the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning opening) is opened. Is controlled by. Then, if the game ball wins a prize while the large winning opening is open, it is detected by the first count switch 23.

Further, in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), when the winning of the first game ball to the big winning opening is detected in the first round, the solenoid 052IW109 is driven and V. The region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is controlled to be open for an extremely short period (0.02 seconds in this example). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings are detected in the large winning openings in the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), special The variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is controlled to be closed again, and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot, the predetermined detection valid period is after an extremely short opening period (0.02 seconds in this example) of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101. It is a period until a predetermined period (500 ms in this example) elapses.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. Therefore, the game ball easily enters the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and is easily controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2), in the big hit game based on the normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is extremely short. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 052IW104 during the predetermined detection valid period, and it is extremely rare that the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic state after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, in this example, in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 at a higher rate during the jackpot game than in the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 10-12 to 10-14 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 10-12 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit A. Further, FIG. 10-13 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. Further, FIG. 10-14 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 10-12 (2) shows. 10-14 (2) show the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1). In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of small hit A). , Since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10-14 (1), the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed. After at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the fluctuation time of the next normal symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time before opening the second start winning opening of 0.1 seconds, has elapsed. is there. Therefore, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol variation time of 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time of 0.1 seconds, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 to when the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B is shorter than the time when the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is already open. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B when the state is controlled. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2). As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, it is normal in the normal symbol display 20. When the variable display of the symbol is executed and it is determined to be a normal symbol, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20, and when it is determined to be off, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. Will be done. In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the hit symbol and the missed symbol are derived and displayed. The time is set to 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the second start winning opening is opened after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has elapsed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening while the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 10-12 (2). In the case of a small hit B, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of a small hit C, FIG. As shown in -14 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened is at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol confirmation time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long. Compared with the first KT state, the game ball is more likely to enter the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball is more likely to win the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, since the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, it can hardly be expected that the game ball will win the special winning opening even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, a game ball is easily won in the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also called "small hit RUSH", and in the second KT state, "small hit RUSH". Character display such as "is displayed.

Further, in this example, a case where the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is different depending on which of the small hit types A to C is used is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be different depending on which of the small hits A to C is the small hit type. In this case, for example, in the case of small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of small hit B or small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short to some extent, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) can be opened by executing the opening of the special variable winning ball device 17 four times for 0.4 seconds. ) May be configured to provide a small hit type in which a game ball can win a prize to some extent, and various modes can be considered. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three types of small hits A to C is shown, but the case is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of small hit types are configured to be provided. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state after the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed. After a total of 3.8 seconds, which is the sum of the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1.0 seconds, the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds, and the processing time of 2.6 seconds before opening the second start winning opening, the game ball The time required from passing through the passing gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be about 0.6 seconds. As described above, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is longer. Since it is longer than the time from when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 until the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled by. Therefore, in the second KT state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 in the state where the normal symbol is not changed to win the variable winning ball device 6B.

In the feature unit 052IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B is the normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103). This is done by executing (see step S26). Further, in the normal symbol process processing of step S26, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), and whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state, or a second KT state. Regardless of whether or not there is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not to make a normal hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

In this feature unit 052IW, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same for each of 0.2 seconds in the first KT state and the second KT state, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after the variable winning ball device 6B is closed can be controlled, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closed period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is configured to have a shorter closing period (interval period) by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. ..

As will be described later, in the feature unit 052IW, in the first KT state, by setting a high base flag indicating that the high base state is set, the high base state is controlled, and FIG. As shown in 10-14 (1), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be long. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14 (2) by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag. It is controlled so that the time is shortened.

For example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, FIGS. 10-12 (1) to 10- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in 14 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 10-12 (2) to 10-14. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may not be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. For example, out of the 50 times shortened fluctuation period of the special symbol in the low probability / first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be deleted in response to the 49th stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the variable winning ball device 6B being long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured by using the flag (special flag) for opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B, the flag for shortening the variation display of the special symbol is further used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled. In this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be managed and controlled separately.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent a right-handed operation from being performed during a low probability / non-KT state.

In this feature unit 052IW, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 to 10-14, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol having a relatively long fluctuation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in the state where the normal symbol has stopped changing and there is no hold memory of the normal symbol. This is because the device 6B is in the closed state, and it is possible to capture the second special symbol aiming at the fluctuation stop timing (in the case of a small hit, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, the passing gate By the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, the variable winning ball device 6B does not open, and the special winning opening can be won). On the other hand, in this feature unit 052IW, by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened after the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Is set to start, so that it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

(Direction control command)
10-15 and 10-16 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15, the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 10R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this feature unit 052IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a display result specification command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display result specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is Since it can be determined that the display result specification command is for the first special symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command is a display result specification command for the second special symbol, the display result is displayed. The designation command can be used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send a display result designation command, but corresponds to each of 10R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has finished lighting. The command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) for designating that the right-handed display 26 has started lighting.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. The command A003 (H) is an effect control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved storage number may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) for designating that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Wait demo display specification command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value command) for designating the currently set setting value. A set value is set in "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 10-15 and 10-16, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. It should be noted that the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(1st special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. The case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A is a state in which the first special symbol display device 4A does not display the variation of the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 052IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first hold storage counter is confirmed. If the first hold storage number is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the 1st reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 052IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the first hold storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The order of extraction is also identifiable and saved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55A). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55A, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started, but the setting change process (process of changing the set value) when the power is turned on. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, the setting value command is configured to be transmitted at each end of the fluctuation display, or the setting value command is transmitted during the fluctuation display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the state is low probability / non-KT, and the low probability / non-KT background specification command is executed. The probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT, and the low probability / first KT background specification command is executed. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, the command is high probability / first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT state is determined and the high accuracy / second KT background specification command is executed. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57A). Specifically, when the second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress. If it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A without performing the processing after step 052IWS58A. As a result, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol, it is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and by shifting to step 052IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. Regardless of which hit determination random number has been acquired, it may be forcibly removed.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the first random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS61A). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot based on the hit type determination random number (step 052IWS62A), the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63A), and step 052IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64A). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS65A). Step 052IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step 052IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 052IWS75A. Move to. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70A). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71A). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72A), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed display 26 is extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 052IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75A.

In this feature unit 052IW, as will be described later, it is highly probable that the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the fluctuation display in the high base state is managed at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / High base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and 50 times of fluctuation display is executed. In the case of low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th fluctuation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 052IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 052IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 052IWS73A and S73B, and the state shifts to the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)).

The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right-handed notification and continuing the right-handed state, and although the high base state has ended as the game state, the fluctuation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for making the production background common to the first KT state while keeping the state.

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS74A or the process of step 052IWS74B described later, the high base state is caused by the start of fluctuation of either the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol. When the final fluctuation of (in this example, the 50th fluctuation display) is started, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set and the fluctuation shortening state is extended. In this case, when the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is set, whether the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol (in this example, the 50th variation display) ends. , Or the other special symbol variation display (in this example, the 51st variation display) is reset, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is reset, and the extension of the variation shortening state is completed. Is desirable.

Then, in step 052IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75A). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75A is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

(1st fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, first, whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set with the special figure time reduction flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened. (Step 052IWS1700A). In this example, it is more advantageous to execute the variation display of the second special symbol by setting the special symbol time reduction flag and performing the shortening control of the variation display of the special symbol (FIG. 10-7). (Refer to FIG. 10-9), since a small hit is likely to occur, the state is controlled to the KT state. Unless the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for KT is selected (step 052IWS1701A). If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the KT shown in FIG. 10-7 (B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The first special symbol variation pattern table for time is selected (step 052IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 is based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 052IWS1701A and S1702A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 10-7 is used (step 052IWS1703A). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1704A).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 052IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and the fluctuation time. (Step 052IWS1705A), and the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 052IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 052IWS1707A).

(First Special Symbol Variation Process) FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120A). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the determination result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 7 designation command) is sent to the effect control CPU 120. Control for transmission is performed (step 052IWS1121A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122A), and when the first fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123A), controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123A). Step 052IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

When the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1125A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS1126A). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is determined by, for example, that the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that the small hit is obtained is set based on the variation display of the second special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127A). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the first big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS1128A). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step 052IWS1125A) or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126A), either the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the variation display of the first special symbol (that is, 6R is a normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127A, N in step 052IWS1128A), the CPU 103 causes the effect control CPU 120 to perform the first compulsory symbol. Control is performed to send a confirmation designation command (step 052IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag are set, the CPU 103 resets the first big hit flag and the first small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 052IWS1130A).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125A to S1129A, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129A. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot or the 6R probability variation jackpot). If the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128A), but in this case, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Based on the small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120A, the processing of steps 052IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 052IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the first variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the first special symbol variation processing is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127A). Therefore, even when the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the first variation is performed during the small hit game. When the update of the time timer is interrupted and the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed and the small hit game is completed, the update of the first variation time timer is restarted.

(1st special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, when the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who performs the right-handed operation. Is advantageous for the player, and the right-handed display 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is lit during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is displayed by executing the processes of steps 052IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When starting, the low probability / first KT state is terminated to shift to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processes of steps 052IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B are executed to end the 50th variation display. The right-handed display 26 is turned off.

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129A of the first special symbol variation processing, it is forced as a stop symbol of the first special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015A). When the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag indicating that the jackpot is started (step 052IWS2016A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. Therefore, right-handed at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021A). Further, the CPU 103 clears the first small hit flag (step 052IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027A.

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is inherently advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when a small hit is made in the variable display of the first special symbol, the small hit type is only small hit A, and it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed display 26 is not lit and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027A).

In this example, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, the right-handed notification that urges the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol, a launch promotion notification that urges the player to launch the game ball aiming at the passing gate 41 can be executed as a right-handed notification. You may be.

In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is not executed, and when the game ball wins the first start winning opening in that state, the right-handed notification or launch promotion notification is executed. (In this case, since the gate is waiting to pass through, even if the game ball wins in the first start winning opening, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started immediately, and the first holding memory is set). It may be configured as.

On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passing gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is low (for example, low volume sound output or small screen display). Therefore, the player may be configured to perform a left-handed notification prompting the player to launch and operate the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the recognition degree is high (for example, loud sound output or It may be configured to perform left-handed notification by (large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, according to the above configuration, a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area is given a slight left-handed notification in a mode in which the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. , The player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation may be configured to perform the left-handed notification in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the game machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation to return to the left-handed operation from the clerk of the game store.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of detected game balls at the passing gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, when the passing gate 41 detects a game ball a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. It may be configured to give a left-handed notification when a small number (for example, one) or more of game balls are detected.

In this feature unit 052IW, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening, or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be terminated and the left-handed notification may be given.

(2nd special symbol normal processing)
FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, there is a state in which the second special symbol display device 4B does not display the variation of the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether the value of the bonus control process flag is a value indicating the bonus control normal process (step S120). Confirm whether or not (step 052IWS50B). In addition, when the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 052IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second hold storage number is 0, the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS52B).

If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. (Step 052IWS53B), the value of the second reserved storage number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is subtracted by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted. (Step 052IWS54B). That is, each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. Store in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each second reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order in which the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, and 4. It has become like. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit the set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 052IWS55B). In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS55B, the setting value command is transmitted every time the fluctuation display is started. The setting value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 052IWS56A of the first special symbol normal process.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step 052IWS57B). Specifically, when the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot is achieved is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B without performing the processing after step 052IWS58B. As a result, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the jackpot determination value is forcibly removed regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly removing the wire is not limited to the above. For example, when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is in progress in step 052IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of order as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 052IWS59B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of whether a random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 052IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as a random number for hit determination without performing the processing of steps 052IWS58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which random number for the hit determination was acquired at the time of the start winning.

When the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is not in progress, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the hit determination random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 052IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 052IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot is determined when a random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. When it is decided to make a big hit (step 052IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS61B). .. Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS62B), and the jackpot type is stored (step 052IWS63B). ), The process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 052IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 052IWS64B). The small hit determination module is a program that determines that a small hit is determined when a random number for hit determination (or a random number for small hit determination) matches a predetermined small hit determination value. When it is decided to make a small hit (step 052IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variation display of the second special symbol (step 052IWS65B). Step 052IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for determining the hit type (step 052IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 052IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 052IWS69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter is not "0", that is, in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the value of the high base count counter by "1" (step 052IWS70B). It is determined whether or not the result is "0" (step 052IWS71B). If the value of the high base count counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B. When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 052IWS72B), and shortens the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time reduction flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 052IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 052IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS75B.

Then, in step 052IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step 052IWS75B). Although not shown, the symbol to be stopped immediately before step 052IWS75B is confirmed.

In step 052IWS59B, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probable change big hit determination table or the probable change big hit determination table in consideration of the gaming state.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 10-18. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10-18, if "first" is read as "second", the second variation pattern process is explained. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 052IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Unless the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, it is not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 uses the non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. Select the second special symbol variation pattern table for KT. If the special figure time reduction flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 fluctuates according to whether or not the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set and the number of fluctuations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, any of the variation pattern tables for the second special symbol for KT shown in FIGS. 10-8 (D) to 10-9 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-8 (D). Select, select the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (E) for the 2nd to 49th variations, and select the second variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-8 (F) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability / first KT state), the first variation is the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10-9 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 10-9 (I) is selected.

(2nd special symbol change processing)
FIG. 10-22 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 052IWS1120B). When the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), that is, the value of the accessory control process flag is from the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small hit. When the value does not indicate the end process (step S128), and neither the big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined time) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened). is there.

If the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120), the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit if it has not yet been transmitted, and the jackpot type. Based on the decision result, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 3 designation command, display result 5 designation command, display result 6 designation command, display result 7 designation command) Is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS1122B), and when the second fluctuation time timer times out (step 052IWS1123B), controls to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1123B). Step 052IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1125B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (step 052IWS1126B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is determined by, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing. , It can be determined by confirming whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set is set based on the variation display of the first special symbol. If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the process ends as it is.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit (step 052IWS1127B). .. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit can be determined by checking, for example, whether or not the second big hit flag is set. If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the process is terminated as it is.

If the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit type is a 10R probability variable jackpot, a 6R probability variable jackpot, or a 2R probability variable jackpot (step 052IWS1128B). .. Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by checking, for example, the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63B. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the process ends as it is.

When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (Y in step 052IWS1125B), or when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step 052IWS1126B), the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and When the variation display of the second special symbol that is neither a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed (Y in step 052IWS1127B, N in step 052IWS1128B), the CPU 103 is the effect control CPU 120. The second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is controlled to be transmitted to (step 052IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big hit flag or the second small hit flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step 052IWS1130B).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS1125B to S1129B, in this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the second special symbol, which is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and the first special symbol is stopped. And the second special symbol do not cause a big hit or a small hit at the same time. In this case, on the effect control CPU 120 side, if the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed, the decorative symbol is changed based on the second forced symbol confirmation designation command transmitted in step 052IWS1129B. As a display result, control is performed so that the out-of-order symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the probability variation jackpot (in this example, the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, Or, if the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes the 2R probability variation jackpot) is being executed, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see Y in step 052IWS1128B), but in this case, the first special symbol. Based on the fact that the variation display of the symbol becomes a small hit, the value of the accessory control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S126), and the game shifts to the small hit game. Therefore, after the next timer interrupt, it is determined as N in step 052IWS1120B, the processing of steps 052IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second fluctuation time timer of step 052IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a probability variation big hit, is being executed, the second variation time timer is during the small hit game. The update of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted.

Further, in this example, the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being performed. If there is, the second special symbol variation process is terminated as it is (see N in step 052IWS1127B). Therefore, even when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit is being executed, the second variation is performed during the small hit game. The update of the time timer is interrupted, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed, and when the small hit game is completed, the update of the second variation time timer is restarted.

By configuring as described above, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the reduced working hours state), the remaining second hold memory can be digested, and a big hit occurs at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

Further, a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol is provided below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol is provided on the right side of the game area. In a game machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening (not a variable winning ball device) and to shift to a normal state via a time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH). , As described above, the configuration in which the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, as the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol increases, the frequency of small hits based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol also increases, but the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is forcibly missed accordingly. By increasing the frequency of this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the second hold memory in the normal state, and further suppress the occurrence of the jackpot at the unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be done.

(2nd special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-23 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 052IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set lighting extension flag (step 052IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2012B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 052IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted in step 052IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation processing, it is forced as the stop symbol of the second special symbol regardless of the determination result at the start of the variation. The out-of-target design is derived and displayed.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 052IWS2015B). When the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2016B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second jackpot flag (step 052IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2018B), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to be lit when a big hit is made in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the big hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on.

If the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 052IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second small hit flag is set (step 052IWS2020B). When the second small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2021B). Further, the CPU 103 clears the second small hit flag (step 052IWS2022B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2023B). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2024B), and is right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed to send a lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2025B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit release preprocessing (step 052IWS2026B). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2027B.

Step 052 By executing the processes of IWS2024B and S2025B, in this example, the right-handed display 26 is started to light when a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, so that it is better for the player to perform the right-handed operation during the small hit game. It is advantageous, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

However, in this example, even if a small hit is made in the variation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed display 26 should already be lit when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 052IWS2023B, if a small hit occurs in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed display 26 is started to light in duplicate. The process of sending a right-handed lighting start specification command is not performed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 052IWS2027B).

(Characteristic control normal processing)
FIG. 10-24 is a flowchart showing a bonus control normal process (step S120) in the bonus control process process. In the accessory control normal process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the jackpot start flag is set (step 052IWS2101). If the jackpot start flag is not set, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot start flag (step 052IWS2102). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer before opening the big winning opening (step 052IWS2103), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step 052IWS2104), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of big hit rounds to "1". "(Step 052IWS2105).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the gate passage waiting process (step 052IWS2106).

(Waiting for gate passage)
FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing a gate passage waiting process (step S121) in the accessory control process process. In the gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has been input (step 052IWS2501). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the process ends as it is. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, the high base flag, and the special time saving flag if set, and clears the value of the high base count counter to 0 ( Step 052IWS2502). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS2503), and sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step 052IWS2504).

In this feature unit 052IW, the jackpot game is not started immediately when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the second special symbol by executing the gate passage waiting process, but the game is played at the passing gate 41. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that the ball has passed and is detected by the gate switch 21.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot opening process (step S123) in the accessory control process process. In the process of opening the jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first count switch 23 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2401). If the first count switch 23 is in the ON state, that is, if the game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected, the CPU 103 has a winning number for counting the number of game balls that have won the big prize opening. The value of the counter is added by 1 (step 052IWS2402). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2403).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state (step 052IWS2404). If the V area switch 052IW106 is in the ON state, that is, if a game ball that has entered the V area 052IW104 is detected, the CPU 103 sets a V winning flag indicating that the game ball has entered the V area 052IW104. (Step 052IWS2405).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter is 10 (step 052IWS2406). If the value of the winning number counter is 10, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2409. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening (step 052IWS2407), and the opening time timer after the subtraction times out. It is confirmed whether or not (step 052IWS2408). If the open time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

When the value of the winning number counter is 10 (Y in step 052IWS2406) or when the open time timer times out (Y in step 052IWS2408), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 for the large winning door. It is stopped and the large winning opening is controlled to be closed (step 052IWS2409). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit a display command after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS2410). Further, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the round number counter (step 052IWS2411).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the post-processing after opening the jackpot (step 052IWS2412).

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S125) in the accessory control process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 052IWS2200), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2202. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 corresponds to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. A value is set (step 052IWS2201), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2202, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2202). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2203). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2203), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the V winning flag is set (step 052IWS2204). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag (step 052IWS2205), sets the probability change flag, and shifts to the probability change state (high probability state) (step 052IWS2206).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot that has ended this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2207). Whether or not it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the special figure time reduction flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2208). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot, the high base flag is not set. Therefore, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / low base state (high) It will be controlled by probability / second KT state).

If it is neither a 10R probability variation jackpot nor a 2R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of jackpot completed this time is a 6R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS2209). Whether or not it is a 6R probability variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step 052IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing or step 052IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2210), and further sets the special time saving flag and shifts to the KT state (step 052IWS2211). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it will be controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, only the high base flag is set, and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base count counter is reset to 0 when the jackpot game is started (see step 052IWS2502 of the gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base count counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is completed, it is controlled to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and the value of the high base count counter is 0 in the subsequent fluctuation display. It is determined as Y in step 052IWS69A of the first special symbol normal processing and step 052IWS69B of the second special symbol normal processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 052IWS70A and step 052IWS70B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not a 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, if it is a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 052IWS2212), and sets the special time saving flag. To the KT state (step 052IWS2213). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step 052IWS2214). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS2215. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2215).

(Small hit end processing)
FIG. 10-28 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (step S128) in the accessory control process process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step 052IWS2300), and if the small hit end display timer is set, proceeds to step 052IWS2302. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 displays on the small hit end display timer corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time). A value corresponding to the time is set (step 052IWS2301), and the process ends.

In step 052IWS2302, the value of the small hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 052IWS2302). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 052IWS2303). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS2303), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set (step 052IWS2304). If the special figure time reduction flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the right-handed display 26 is lit (step 052IWS2305). If the right-handed display 26 is lit, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed display 26 (step 052IWS2306), and also transmits a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120. Control is performed (step 052IWS2307).

In this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol becomes a small hit during the non-KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 starts lighting at the start of the small hit game (steps 052IWS2023B to S2025B). (See), the processing of steps 052IWS2304 to S2307 is executed, so that the right-handed display 26 is turned on at the end of the small hit game.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the accessory control process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory control normal process (step 052IWS2308).

(Transition of game state)
Here, the transition of the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW will be described. FIG. 10-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition the gaming state in the feature unit 052IW. First, in the feature unit 052IW, in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, a 10R probability variable big hit, a 6R probability variable big hit, or a 6R normal big hit mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the high probability / after the end of the big hit game It shifts to the low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, a high probability / high base state (high probability / high probability /) after the jackpot game ends. The first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / low base state, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the jackpot game, and whether the next jackpot occurs. The low probability / high base state is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

After shifting to the KT state (high probability / high base state, low probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), in this feature portion 052IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the firing operation (right-handed) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, a 2R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R normal jackpot is mainly generated.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in this feature unit 052IW, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 6R probability variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is once high / high. In the base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214). In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state loops at a rate of 35%. If a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot occurs and the probability / high base state is reached, and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring, FIG. 10-29 shows. As shown, it shifts to a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) (see steps 052IWS69A to S73A, S69B to S73B).

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game. Then, after the end of the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2208). ). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In this feature unit 052IW, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot is 15 when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. Since it is% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, the probability is high after the jackpot game ends. / The high base state (high probability / first KT state) is entered, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 052IWS2204 to S2206, S2209 to S2211). However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 fluctuation display is completed (see steps 052IWS2212 to S2214).

In addition, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but the variation of the second special symbol is performed at a low rate. It is also possible that the display will be performed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the jackpot game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). become. Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 10-29, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variation display of the first special symbol is performed at a low rate. May be executed. In this case, when a 10R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, it shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, if the game ball enters the V region 052IW104 during the big hit game, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). In addition, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next jackpot occurs or the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. The base state will be maintained.

(Normal symbol process processing)
Next, a normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 10-30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 and the gate switch 21 is turned on (step 052IWS5111), Control is performed to transmit the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passing process (step 052IWS5113).

When the process of steps 052IWS5111 to S5113 is executed in the feature unit 052IW and the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area. Is it in a state of waiting for the passage of the gate after the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and before the jackpot game is started? Regardless of whether or not, the gate passage specification command is sent.

Then, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes shown in steps 052IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In the feature unit 052IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected in step 052IWS5111, the gate switch passing process of step 052IWS5113 is executed regardless of whether or not the gate is waiting to pass. Normally, the variable display of the symbol is executed, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when it is not in the gate passage waiting state, and the normal symbol is executed even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 in the gate passing state. It may be configured not to execute the variable display of.

Further, in this feature unit 052IW, the passing gate 41 is normally used as a gate for both the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process processing (see steps S25A and S25B) is normally performed in the timer interrupt processing. Since it is executed before the symbol process process (see step S26), the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the normal starting area is performed after the detection process of the passage of the game ball of the passing gate 41 as the operating region is performed. The detection process is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch pass processing (step 052IWS5113): In the CPU 103, the count value (gate pass memory number) of the gate pass memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the pass gate 41) is the maximum value (in this example, " 4 ”) is confirmed. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by +1. The LED of the normal figure hold indicator 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number for determining the normal symbol hit and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of stored gates.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100): When the CPU 103 is in a state where it can start the fluctuation of the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 052IWS5100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the display 20 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20 is not being opened or closed), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory counter is confirmed. If the number of gate passing memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol). Then, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation processing (step 052IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time in the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 052IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a missed symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the time before opening the normal electric accessory is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103).

Pre-processing for opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol process timer to the normal electric accessory operation time and timers. Is started, and the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104).

Normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, the variable winning ball device 6B is closed. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "0") indicating the normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100).

(Normal pattern normal processing)
FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step 052IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passing memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the gate passing memory number counter (step 052IWS5121). If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step 052IWS5121), the process ends as it is. If the gate-passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 052IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol hit determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate-passing memory number = 1 (step 052IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passing memory counter by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 052IWS5123). That is, the random value for normal symbol hit determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate-passing storage = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random values for normal symbol hit determination stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each gate passing memory number are always extracted is that the gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is designed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol, performs a lottery process based on a random number (random number value for determining whether to hit a normal symbol), and determines whether or not to hit a normal symbol. (Step 052IWS5127). In this feature unit 052IW, in step 052IWS5127, the CPU 103 is uniformly 99/100 regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided that it will be a normal symbol with a probability.

In step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is within the hit range (when it is a hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as a display result (step 052IWS5128), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130. Further, in step 052IWS5127, when the read normal symbol hit determination random value is not within the hit range (when it is out of the range), the CPU 103 sets the out-of-order symbol as the display result (step 052IWS5129), and proceeds to step 052IWS5130.

In step 052IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y, S5131 in step 052IWS5130). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal symbol fluctuation time (N, S5132 in step 052IWS5130).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 052IWS5101) (step 052IWS5133).

(Normal symbol stop processing)
FIG. 10-32 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process (step 052IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3702). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3702), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (in step 052IWS5127). (Whether or not it was determined) is confirmed (step 052IWS3703). It should be noted that whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol is confirmed by, for example, setting the normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 052IWS5127, and checking whether or not the flag is set. Can be done.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol but a missed symbol (N in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating normal symbol normal processing (step 052IWS5100) (step 052IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0") (step 052IWS3708).

In step 052IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step 052IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3706). Further, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 052IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory opening preprocessing (step 052IWS5103) (step 052IWS3707).

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
FIG. 10-33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening pretreatment (step 052IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process timer to -1 (step 052IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 052IWS3802). If the normal symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS3802), the process ends as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric accessory has elapsed (Y in step 052IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 052IWS3803). , That is, in the case of the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3805). When the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 052IWS3804).

In this way, in this feature unit 052IW, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the first KT state, and 0.2 seconds is set as the normal electric accessory opening time in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to win a start prize in the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball is less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the start winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the feature unit 052IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened many times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device in the normal state or the second KT state). The number of times the 6B is opened may be set to 1 time, whereas the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B may be opened may be set to 2 times in the first KT state). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning of the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, the control for lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B shown above and the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state. It may be executed in combination with the control for increasing the number of times of opening.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B in the open state (step 052IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric accessory operation process (step 052IWS5104) (step 052IWS3807).

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 10-34 to 10-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 052IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 052IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 052IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 052IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 052IWS615).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 052IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 052IWS618).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 052IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 052IWS620). ).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation command, 2nd symbol confirmation command, 1st forced symbol confirmation command, 2nd forced symbol confirmation command) (step 052IWS621) ), The effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 052IWS622). For example, when the first symbol confirmation command is received, the first confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation command is received, the second confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the first forced confirmation command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the second forced confirmation command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 052IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS624). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS625).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 052IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the display of the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step 052IWS627). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS628).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 052IWS624 and S627, a right-handed display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the jackpot game.

In addition, for example, by changing the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display displayed during the big hit game, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed. For example, when the right-handed display is started in step 052IWS624, the right-handed display of the white display color is normally started, but when the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided, the set value "1" is set. If is, the right-handed display of the blue display color is started at a relatively high rate, and if the setting value is "2", the right-handed display of the green display color is started at a relatively high rate. , When the setting value is "3", the right-handed display of the yellow display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "4", the right of the orange display color is relatively high. When the setting value is "5", the right-handed display of the red display color is started at a relatively high rate, and when the setting value is "6", the right-handed display is started at a relatively high rate. Right-handed display of the rainbow-colored display color may be started.

Further, for example, the right-handed display is configured to be continuously executed even during the KT state after the big hit game ends, and the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed and set at the timing of the end of the big hit game. It may be configured to perform a value suggestion effect.

Further, for example, when the fluctuation display of 50 times is finished in the low probability / first KT state and the state shifts to the normal state (low probability / low base state), the left-handed display is configured to start, and the left-handed display is started. The display mode (for example, the display color) of the display may be changed to execute the set value suggestion effect. When the control of the game state is switched in some form in this way, the set value suggestion effect may be configured to be executable.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step 052IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 052IWS630).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step 052IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 052IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a display command in which the large winning opening is open (step 052IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 is the number of winnings for counting the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening during the round of the big hit game. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS634). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the big winning opening opening flag that specifies that the big winning opening is being opened (the round period during the big hit game) (step 052IWS635).

In this example, by executing the process of step 052IWS634, the value of the winning number counter is cleared to 0 at the timing of receiving the large winning opening opening display command (timing to start the round), which is extremely rare. Even if an over-winning is detected during the interval period after the end of the round period, the value is counted in the winning number counter.

If the received effect control command is a display command after opening the large winning opening (step 052IWS636), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the large winning opening that specifies that it is an interval period after opening the large winning opening. (Step 052IWS637).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS638), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS639).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 052IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 (step 052IWS641).

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / non-KT background designation command (step 052IWS642), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / non-KT state (for example, Control to display the image (blue background image) (step 052IWS643). If the effect control CPU 120 is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating that it is in the first KT state (step 052IWS644). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a prize for counting the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state. If the ball count counter is set, the value of the prize ball counter is reset (cleared to 0) (step 052IWS645).

In this example, a game ball wins in the big winning opening during a big hit game (except during a big hit game based on 2R probability variation big hit or 2R normal big hit), or a game is played in a special winning opening during a high probability / second KT state. The value of the prize ball counter is cumulatively updated when a ball wins a prize (see steps 052IWS660 and S667), but the game state has a low probability / due to the processing of step 052IWS645 being executed. The value of the prize ball counter is cleared to 0 when the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed after the high base state (low probability / first KT state) is reached and the low probability / low base state is reached.

If the received effect control command is a low accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS646), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, Control to display with the green background image) (step 052IWS647). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 052IWS648), and if set, the high probability state flag indicating that the state is in the high probability state and the second KT state indicating that the state is in the second KT state. Reset the 2KT status flag (step 052IWS649).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / first KT background designation command (step 052IWS650), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / first KT state (for example,). Control to display in the yellow background image) (step 052IWS651). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 052IWS652), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 052IWS653).

If the received effect control command is a high-accuracy / second KT background designation command (step 052IWS654), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 as a background image according to the high probability / second KT state (for example,). Control to display the image (red background image) (step 052IWS655). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 052IWS656), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 052IWS657).

If the received effect control command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step 052IWS658), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is in progress. (Step 052IWS659). Whether or not the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot is in progress is determined by, for example, whether the value of the effect control process flag is during the jackpot effect process (step S176) to the ending effect process (step S177). ), And also check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 2 specified command to the display result 4 specified command. It can be judged by.

During a big hit game based on a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 adds 15 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS660). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS661). The prize ball number display is a display of the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning the big prize opening and the special winning opening during the big hit game and the high probability / second KT state.

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS658 to S661, in this example, the prize ball is based on the fact that a prize is generated in the big winning opening during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot. The value of the number counter and the number of prize balls display are updated. On the other hand, even during the big hit game, if a prize is made to the big prize opening during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated and the prize ball is not updated. The number display is also not updated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the over-winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS662). It should be noted that the "over-winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when the over-winning to the large winning opening occurs and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS663). In addition, in the "Prize ball number display suggestion effect", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is predetermined. It is an effect that is executed at the timing when the number (in this example, 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666) is reached, and suggests the currently set value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process for determining and executing the prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS664). In the "Prize ball number emphasis production", the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on winning a prize in the big prize opening or the special winning opening during the big hit game or the high probability / second KT state is a predetermined number. (In this example, 1000 pieces, 2000 pieces, 3000 pieces, 4000 pieces, 5000 pieces) is highlighted.

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning designation command (step 052IWS665), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS666). If the second KT state flag is set (that is, during the high probability / second KT state), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the prize ball counter (step 052IWS667). Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the prize ball number display displayed on the image display device 5 based on the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition (step 052IWS668).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS665-S668, in this example, the value of the prize ball counter and the prize ball are based on the fact that a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening. The number display is updated. On the other hand, even in the KT state, if a special prize is won during the high probability / first KT state or the low probability / first KT state, the value of the prize ball counter is not updated. The prize ball number display is also not updated (however, only the value of the prize ball counter is not updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not reset).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small hit winning suggestion effect process for determining and executing the small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS669). It should be noted that the "small hit winning suggestion effect" is an effect that is executed at the timing when a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and a prize is generated in the special winning opening, and suggests the currently set value. ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 052IWS663 and executes the prize ball number display suggestion effect process (step 052IWS663). Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the prize ball number emphasizing effect process (step 052IWS664).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 052IWS670). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS611.

(Suggestion production processing at the time of over winning)
FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing the suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS662) at the time of over winning. In the over-winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first adds 1 to the value of the winning number counter (step 052IWS301). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the winning number counter after addition is 11 or more (step 052IWS302). If the value of the winning number counter is 11 or more (that is, if an over-winning to the large winning opening has occurred), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, and the presence / absence and type of the over-winning suggestion effect are determined (step 052IWS303).

FIG. 10-39 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of over winning. As shown in FIG. 10-39, in the over-winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no over-winning suggestion effect, over-winning suggestion effect A, over-winning suggestion effect B, over-winning suggestion effect C, and over-winning. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect D, the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning, and the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the game ball wins in the large winning opening, the winning display (in this example, “+15”) is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-39, when the "over-winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound B different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound C different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound D different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R win a sound E different from the normal sound. Sound is output. Further, when the "over-winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, different determination values are assigned to the over-winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. In step 052IWS303, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of over winning are determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect B at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of over winning is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-39, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect, which is the sum of the over-winning suggestion effects A to F, is determined. 10% + 8% + 7% + 5% + 5% + 5% = 40%, 45% when the set value is "2", 50% when the set value is "3", and the set value. When it is "4", it is 55%, when it is the set value "5", it is 60%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 65%. As described above, in this example, since over-winning occurs relatively rarely, the ratio of determining the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is relatively high as compared with the small hit-winning suggestion effect described later. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the over-winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS303 (step 052IWS304). If it is determined to execute the over-winning suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS305). .. For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in the blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS306). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of over winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when the value of the winning number counter is 10 or less (N in step 052IWS302), or when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of over winning (N in step 052IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. In the normal display color (white in this example), the winning display is controlled to be displayed (step 052IWS307). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS308).

(Suggestion production processing at the time of small hit prize)
FIG. 10-40 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS669) at the time of winning a small hit. In the small hit winning suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the small hit winning suggestion effect. This is performed, and the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined (step 052IWS321).

FIG. 10-41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the suggestion effect determination table at the time of winning a small hit. As shown in FIG. 10-41, in the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table, there is no small hit winning suggestion effect, small hit winning suggestion effect A, small hit winning suggestion effect B, and small hit winning suggestion effect. Judgment values are assigned to C, the small hit winning suggestion effect D, the small hit winning suggestion effect E, and the small hit winning suggestion effect F, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the game ball wins in the special winning opening, the winning display (in this example, "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Character display) is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-41, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect A" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5, and the speaker is displayed. A winning sound of sound A different from the normal sound is output from 8L and 8R. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect B" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the green display color on the image display device 5, and the sound B different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect C" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5, and the sound C different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect D" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and the sound D different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect E" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5, and the sound E different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound is output. Further, when the "small hit winning suggestion effect F" is executed, the winning display is displayed in the rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and the sound F different from the normal sound is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The winning sound of is output.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, different judgment values are assigned to the small hit winning suggestion effect determination table depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" the current set value is. .. In step 052IWS321, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615) and specifies the current set value. Then, the presence / absence and type of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit is determined based on the determination value corresponding to the specified set value.

As shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect B is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect C at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "4", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect D at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "5", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect E at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high. Further, in this example, when the set value is "6", the ratio of determining the execution of the suggestion effect F at the time of winning a small hit is relatively high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, in this example, when the set value is "1", the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect A to F, which is the sum of the small hit winning suggestion effects A to F. Is 2% + 1% + 1% + 1% = 5%, 6% when the set value is "2", 7% when the set value is "3", and the set value "4". When it is, it is 8%, when it is the set value "5", it is 9%, and when it is the set value "6", it is 10%. As described above, in this example, the ratio of determining the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is relatively low as compared with the over-winning suggestion effect already described.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS321 (step 052IWS322). If the execution of the small hit winning suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the winning display according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step). 052IWS323). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the image display device 5 controls to display the winning display in a blue display color. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect (step 052IWS324). For example, if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect A at the time of a small hit winning, the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning (N in step 052IWS322), the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning display in the normal display color (white in this example) on the image display device 5. (Step 052IWS325). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls to output the winning sound of the normal sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 052IWS326).

It should be noted that the reliability of the set value suggestion may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect at the time of over winning is executed or the suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is executed. For example, the over-winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6", whereas the small hit If the suggestion effect F at the time of winning is executed, it may be configured so that the set value "6" is confirmed. On the contrary, for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect F can be executed at any of the set values "1" to "6", but is executed at a relatively high rate when the set value is "6". On the other hand, if the suggestion effect F at the time of over winning is executed, the set value "6" may be determined.

Further, in this example, the over-winning suggestion effect and the small hit-winning suggestion effect make the display mode of the winning display (display color in this example) different from the usual one, and output a winning sound different from the usual one. The case where it is executed by the aspect is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, by setting only one of the winning display display mode (display color in this example) and the winning sound to be different from the normal mode, the over winning suggestion effect and the small hit winning suggestion effect are executed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, for example, by displaying the effect display at the timing of the occurrence of over winning or the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening, or by changing the display color of the lamp or LED, a suggestion effect at the time of over winning or a small hit winning It may be configured to perform a time suggestion effect.

(Prize ball number display suggestion production processing)
FIG. 10-42 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing (step 052IWS663). In the prize ball number display suggestion effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 456 first (step 052IWS341). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS341, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 465, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS342). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and draws lots based on random numbers. The process is performed to determine the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A (step 052IWS343). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

FIG. 10-43 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, a character display such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed, at least the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 456 first (N in step 052IWS341), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N). Step 052IWS344). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS344, the effect is controlled. If the value of the prize ball counter is 555, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS345). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect B. (Step 052IWS346). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, a character display such as "555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed, at least the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that it is more than that.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 555 first (N in step 052IWS344), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N). Step 052IWS347). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS347, for effect control. If the value of the prize ball counter is 675, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter has reached 666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS348). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C. Determine (step 052IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, a character display such as "666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is determined with a probability of 1%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 666 first (N in step 052IWS347), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N). Step 052IWS350). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added in increments of 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS350, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2460 or 2465. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2456 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more (step 052IWS351). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "4" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "4" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect D. Is determined (step 052IWS352). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, a character display such as "2456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "4" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is determined with a probability of 5%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed only when the set value is the set value "4" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed, the set value "4" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2456 first (N in step 052IWS350), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N). Step 052IWS353). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS353, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2555 or 2560. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2555 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more (step 052IWS354). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "5" or more can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "5" or more, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and has or does not have the prize ball number display suggestion effect E. (Step 052IWS355). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "5" or more. As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is determined with a probability of 3%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed only when the set value is the set value "5" or more. Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed, the set value "5" is executed. It will be confirmed that the above is the case.

Unless the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2555 first (N in step 052IWS353), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first (N). Step 052IWS356). In this example, 15 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the big winning opening during the big hit game, and 10 prize balls are obtained if the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state. Is obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15 or 10. Therefore, in step 052IWS356, the effect control CPU 120 determines the prize ball if the value of the prize ball counter is 2670 or 2675. It is determined that the value of the number counter reaches 2666 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2666 first, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" (step 052IWS357). Whether or not the current set value is the set value "6" can be specifically determined by checking the stored contents of the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). If the current set value is the set value "6", the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the prize ball number display suggestion effect effect determination table, and determines the presence or absence of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F. Determine (step 052IWS358). Then, the process proceeds to step 052IWS359.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, when the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, a character display such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the current set value is set. It is suggested that the set value is "6". As shown in FIGS. 10-43, in this example, the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined with a probability of 2%. In this example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed only when the set value is the set value "6". Therefore, if the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed, the set value "6" is used. It will be confirmed that there is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined in step 052IWS343, S346, S349, S352, S355, S358 (step 052IWS359). If the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number display suggestion effect (step 052IWS360). For example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "456 OVER".

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, when viewed from the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game, the period during the big hit game becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 3%, 2%, and 1%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed, the set value "5" or more is confirmed, and the set value " 6 ”The accuracy of confirmation and suggestion of set values is increasing. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-43, when viewed in the prize ball number display suggestion effects D to F executed during the period during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the small hit RUSH is in progress. As the period of the prize balls increases and the number of prize balls increases, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect decreases to 5%, 3%, and 2%, while the set value "4" or more is confirmed and the set value. The accuracy of confirming "5" or more, confirming the set value "6", and suggesting the set value is increasing.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH increases and the number of prize balls increases, the probability of executing the prize ball number display suggestion effect increases. It may be configured to go. Further, for example, as the period during the big hit game or the period during the small hit RUSH becomes longer and the number of prize balls increases, the accuracy of suggesting the set value may decrease.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-43, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to C executed during the big hit game and the prize ball number display suggestion executed during the small hit RUSH period. Although the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is different between the effects D to F, the execution probability of the prize ball number display suggestion effect is not limited to such a mode, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed with the same execution probability. You may.

(Prize ball number emphasis production processing)
FIG. 10-44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number emphasizing effect processing (step 052IWS664). In the prize ball number emphasis effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prize ball number counter first reaches the threshold value for each 1000 (1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000 in this example). (Step 052IWS371). In this example, if a game ball wins in the big prize opening during the big hit game, 15 prize balls are obtained, and the value of the prize ball counter is added by 15. Therefore, in step 052IWS371, the effect is controlled. For example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 1000 or 1005, the CPU 120 determines that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 1000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 2000 or 2005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 2000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 3000 or 3005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 3000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 4000 or 4005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 4000 first. Further, for example, if the value of the prize ball counter is 5000 or 5005, it is determined that the value of the prize ball counter reaches 5000 first.

If the value of the prize ball counter reaches the threshold value for every 1000 first, the effect control CPU 120 uses a prize ball number emphasis effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the prize ball number emphasis effect, and is a random number. A lottery process is performed based on the above, and it is determined whether or not the prize ball number emphasizing effect is present (step 052IWS372).

FIG. 10-45 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prize ball number emphasizing effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10-45, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 1000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect A is determined with a probability of 50%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed, a character display such as "1000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 2000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect B is determined with a probability of 60%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 3000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect C is determined with a probability of 70%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is executed, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 4000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect D is determined with a probability of 80%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is executed, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in this example, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches 5000, the execution of the prize ball number emphasis effect E is determined with a probability of 90%. When the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined in step 052IWS372 (step 052IWS373). If the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to execute the determined type of prize ball number emphasizing effect (step 052IWS374). For example, if it is decided to execute the prize ball number emphasizing effect A, the image display device 5 controls to display a character display such as "1000 OVER".

In this example, when the number of prize balls reaches 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, and 5000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect can be executed. It is not limited to the mode. For example, not only when the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed in all of these cases, but also when the prize ball number reaches 1000, 2000, and 3000, the prize ball number emphasis effect can be executed. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when the number of prize balls reaches 6000 or 7000, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be executable, and various aspects can be considered.

As shown in FIGS. 10-44 and 10-45, the prize ball number emphasizing effect is different from the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-43, and is irrelevant to the current set value. It is a production that is decided and executed. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, by changing the display mode of the prize ball number emphasizing effect, the prize ball number emphasizing effect may be configured to be feasible in a mode suggesting the current set value. For example, the current set value may be suggested by displaying a character display such as "1000 OVER" or "2000 OVER" in a display color different from the usual one.

(Variable display start waiting process)
FIG. 10-46 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (step 052IWS811). Whether or not the variation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, setting a variation pattern command reception flag indicating that the variation pattern command has been received when the variation pattern command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). In step 052IWS811, it may be confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the variation display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 052IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (that is, the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol. (Step 052IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns # 01 to # 34. It can be determined by confirming whether or not. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is terminated as it is. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 052IWS815).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS812 to S815, in the feature unit 052IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the first special symbol. When it is executed and in the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is in the KT state, or even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is in the non-KT state. , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-47 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol (step 052IWS920). Whether or not to execute the variation display of the first special symbol is determined by, for example, that the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation patterns # 01 to # 09. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is. When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation display this time is a small hit (step 052IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is checked, for example, whether or not the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 7 designation command. It can be judged by. If it is a small hit variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines a non-reach off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 052IWS922).

As already explained, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, there is only a case where the small hit is A, and the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. You can hardly expect a prize. Therefore, by executing the process of steps 052IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, the non-reach out-of-reach symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. This prevents the player from having excessive expectations.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol (N in step 052IWS920) or when it is not a small hit variation (N in step 052IWS921), the effect control CPU 120 stops the decorative symbol according to the variation display result. Is determined (step 052IWS923). In step 052IWS923, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result 1 designation command (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlier symbol or the left and right decorative symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols do not completely match are received. Determine the combination of matching out-of-reach symbols. In addition, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols aligned with the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols on the left, middle, and right is determined. Further, when the display result 3 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 6R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of the symbols in which the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" is determined. In addition, when the display result 5 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation jackpot is determined), the combination of symbols whose decorative symbol inside includes a special symbol (in this example, the symbol "R") is determined. .. In addition, when a display result 4 designation command or a display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a 6R normal jackpot or a 2R normal jackpot), a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are even numbers. To determine. Further, when the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), the combination of the decorative symbols of the small hit symbol (for example, "135") is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation display this time is out of order (step 052IWS924). To check whether the variable display this time is out of order, for example, check whether the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If there is no deviation fluctuation, the process directly proceeds to step 052IWS928. If the fluctuation is out of alignment (Y in step 052IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value. (Step 052IWS925).

In step 052IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the set value stored in the set value storage area (see step 052IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses a table corresponding to the specified set value as a set value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the set value suggestion effect, and performs a lottery process based on a random number to set. Determine the presence / absence and type of value suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the set value suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-48, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. Judgment values are assigned to the suggestion effect E and the set value suggestion effect F, respectively.

The set value suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “1” is used. In some cases, the execution rate is the highest. Further, the set value suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “2” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect C is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “3” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect D is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in an orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “4” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect E is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “5” The execution rate is the highest when it is. Further, the set value suggestion effect F is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined character image in a rainbow-colored display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIGS. 10-48, the set value “ When it is "6", the execution rate is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is not the second KT state), the process proceeds to step 052IWS928 as it is. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 052IWS926), that is, in the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 indicates that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) continues. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 052IWS927).

FIG. 10-49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-49, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is not determined, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B are determined. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. Further, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed by displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-49, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "2", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is produced. The execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "3", and the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest when the setting value is "4". Is the next highest, and when the set value is "5", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-49, the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is when the set value is "6". Execution rate is the highest.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the set value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the set value is "6". However, when the second KT state is in the state, the jackpot occurs. Since the second KT state may end as an opportunity, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (the probability of continuation is high), and the setting value "6" is set. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the set value is "6", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

As described above, the continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be extended without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution rate of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest. Therefore, especially when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed. It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be used, the set value suggestion effect, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect based on the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command. Select a process table according to the set value suggestion effect and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect (step 052IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer setting value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 052IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 052IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 052IWS930). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a control signal (display control execution data) to the VDP in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

When it is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the symbol (during the deviation fluctuation).

Further, when it is decided to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 052IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 052IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the deviation variation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time in the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer (step 052IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process (step S172) during variable display (step 052IWS932).

(Variable display production processing)
FIG. 10-50 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IWS8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 052IWS8102). When the process timer times out (step 052IWS8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 052IWS8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 052IWS8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 052IWS8106). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is in the non-KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 1 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 052IWS8107). If the first symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first symbol confirmation designation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the first forced symbol confirmation designation command (for example, whether the first forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8108). If the first forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8109). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8110).

If the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set in step 052IWS8106 (that is, if it is in the KT state), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the second symbol confirmation designation command (for example, the first 2 Whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set) is confirmed (step 052IWS8111). If the second symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the second symbol confirmation command has not been received, the effect control CPU 120 has received the second forced symbol confirmation command (for example, whether the second forced confirmation command reception flag has been set). Is confirmed (step 052IWS8112). If the second forced symbol confirmation designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of replacing the stop symbol of the decorative symbol determined in step 052IWS923 of the variable display start setting process with an outlier symbol (step 052IWS8113). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 052IWS8114).

If the first forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8108, or if the second forced symbol confirmation command is not received in step 052IWS8112, the effect control CPU 120 uses the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer. Checks if has timed out (step 052IWS8115). If the decorative symbol fluctuation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 switches to the process data for the standby effect (step 052IWS8116). Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 052IWS8117).

In this example, as described above, the case where the variation display of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed. In the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variation display of the second special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation big hit, is being executed, during the small hit game. , The update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. The fact that the decorative symbol variation time timer timed out in step 052IWS8115 without receiving any of the symbol confirmation designation commands means that the update of the first variation time timer or the second variation time timer is interrupted in this way, and the first This is the case where the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed. In this case, in this example, the processing of steps 052IWS8116 and S8117 is executed to switch to the standby effect, and then the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted, and finally one special The standby effect is continued until the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is completed. The "standby effect" is, for example, an effect in which the image display device 5 puts the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right into a temporary stop state in a state of shaking fluctuation or slight fluctuation.

For example, in the image display device 5, when the fluctuation display of the system small symbol or the fourth symbol is also executed, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special When the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed, the variable display of these system small symbols and the fourth special symbol is also continuously executed. Then, when the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is restarted and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is finally stopped and displayed, these system small symbols and the fourth symbol are displayed. The fluctuation display is also stopped.

(Waiting processing per special figure)
10-51 and 10-52 are flowcharts showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 052IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9706. In the feature unit 052IW, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 052IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when the jackpot effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the effect during the jackpot has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is performed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9706 without execution.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 052IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 052IWS9717. In the feature unit 052IW, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step 052IWS9716. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit medium effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but the small hit medium effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 052IWS9703 is displayed. The process proceeds to step 052IWS9717 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. , Small hit symbol) is controlled to be fixedly displayed (step 052IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received and the process of replacing with the misaligned symbol is executed in steps 052IWS8109 and S8113, the effect control CPU 120 is deviated from the symbol in step 052IWS9703. Is controlled to be confirmed and displayed.

When the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9706). When the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 052IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS9708). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot generated this time is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot (step 052IWS9709). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot is determined by, for example, whether or not the received display result specification command is a display result 2 designation command to a display result 4 designation command. It can be judged by checking. If it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS9710).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS9708 to S9710, in this example, the display of the number of prize balls is started when the jackpot game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, or the 6R normal jackpot is started. On the other hand, even if it is a big hit, the display of the number of prize balls is not started when the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit is started.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the big hit (step 052IWS9711). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9712), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 052IWS9713).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step S176) (step 052IWS9714).

If the big hit symbol is not confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (N in step 052IWS9704), and if the small hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (Y in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 is stopped. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 052IWS9716).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 052IWS9717). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 052IWS9718).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small hit medium effect (step 052IWS9719). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 052IWS9720), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 052IWS9721).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process (step S174) (step 052IWS9722).

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is not displayed in the process of step 052IWS9703 (that is, when the missed symbol is displayed) (N in step 052IWS9704 and N in step 052IWS9715), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS9723).

(Ending production processing)
FIG. 10-53 is a flowchart showing an ending effect process (step S177) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the effect period measurement timer (step 052IWS951). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the completion of all rounds of the jackpot game in the jackpot effect process (see step S176). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step 052IWS952).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 052IWS953), and the effect device (image display device 5) according to the contents of the process data n. , Game effect lamp 9, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) is executed (step 052IWS954). For example, an effect of displaying the end of the jackpot or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 052IWS955), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step 052IWS956). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step 052IWS957).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step 052IWS952), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game ending this time is a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot (step). 052IWS958). Whether or not the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 6R normal jackpot is determined is, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 3 designation command or the display result 4 designation command. Can be determined by checking. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to end the display of the prize ball number display (step 052IWS959).

By executing the processes of steps 052IWS958 to S959, in this example, when a jackpot game based on a 6R probability variation jackpot or a 6R normal jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is displayed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot is displayed. The prize ball number display is erased at the end of the game, and the prize ball number display is not displayed during the high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot game that ends this time is a jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot (step 052IWS960). Whether or not it is a 2R probability variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 5 designation command. If it is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the prize ball number display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 052IWS961). If the prize ball number display is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start displaying the prize ball number display (step 052IWS962).

By executing the process of steps 052IWS960 to S962, in this example, when the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation jackpot is executed, the prize ball number display is not displayed during the jackpot game (however, however). In this example, if the prize ball number display is displayed before the 2R probability variation big hit, the prize ball number display is continuously displayed but the display is not updated), and the high probability after the big hit game is completed. / During the 2nd KT state, the prize ball number display is displayed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 052IWS963).

(Production example)
Next, an effect mode of the effect executed by the feature unit 052IW will be described. First, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the setting value suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 10-54 (A), when the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is being executed on the image display device 5, the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is determined in FIG. 10-54 (B1). )-(B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by displaying the predetermined character image 052IW001,052IW002,052IW003 on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when executing the set value suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B1), it is set by displaying a predetermined character image 052IW001 in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The value suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B2), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestion effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-54 (B3), the set value is set according to the mode in which the predetermined character image 052IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestion production is executed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-54, the case where the set value suggestion effect A, the set value suggestion effect C, and the set value suggestion effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestion effect B is executed. Is displayed with a predetermined character image in a green display color, a predetermined character image is displayed with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow is displayed when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in a color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image having a different display color is displayed and the setting value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. You can have a sense of expectation for it.

Next, the production mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect. In this example, it is possible to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol that is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In this example, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), for example, the image display device 5 displays a character display 052IW004 such as "small hit RUSH", and the second KT state. It is recognizable that it is inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (A), when the image display device 5 is executing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-55 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by displaying a predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where an image of a racing car is displayed as a predetermined effect image 052IW005, 052IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, when executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a predetermined effect image 052IW005 in a blue display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 10-55 (B2), the predetermined effect image 052IW005 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the effect image of any display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is performed, the jackpot game is in progress. As shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed display 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) (see steps 052IWS2018A and S2018B). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (step 052IWS2019A, S2019B, S639). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 052IWS624).

Further, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the second special symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2)) during the small hit game. The right-handed display 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 052IWS2024B). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed lighting notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command (see steps 052IWS2025B and S639). .. However, unlike during the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (2), the right-handed display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in this example, when a small hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 10-56 (3), the right-handed display 26 is turned on and the right is turned on during the small hit game. The striking notification LED 37 is not lit, and the right-strike display 052IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect will be described. 10-57 and 10-58 are explanatory views for explaining the production modes of the over-winning suggestion effect, the small hit winning suggestion effect, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect. In FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C) .... Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, a case where the jackpot game state is controlled based on the 10R probability variation jackpot is shown.

As shown in FIG. 10-57 (A), during the big hit game, the image display device 5 displays characters such as "Big hit!" And the number of rounds such as "Round 2". The prize ball number display 052IW008 is displayed. Further, when a normal winning (non-over winning) to the big winning opening occurs during the big hit game, the winning is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example) as shown in FIG. 10-57 (B). 052IW009 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed, and the winning sound of the normal sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see steps 052IWS307 and S308).

Next, it is assumed that an over-winning occurs during the jackpot game, and the execution of the suggestion effect at the time of over-winning is decided based on the occurrence of the over-winning. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (C), the winning display 052IW010 (in this example, the character display of "+15") is displayed according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect, and the speaker 8L is displayed. , 8R outputs a winning sound according to the type of the determined over-winning suggestion effect (see steps 052IWS305 and S306). For example, when the over-winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 456 and the number of prize balls reaches 456. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-57 (D), the character display 052IW011 such as "456 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect A is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is decided, the image display device 5 sets "555". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect B is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect C, the image display device 5 displays "666".
A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect C is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (E), when the jackpot game is completed, the gaming state is controlled to the high probability / second KT state after the jackpot game is completed. Further, when controlled to the high probability / second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (F), a character display such as "Small hit RUSH in progress!" Is displayed, and the prize ball number display 052IW008 continues. Is displayed.

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball is won in the special winning opening, but if it is not decided to execute the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit winning, FIG. 10-58. As shown in (F), the winning display 052IW012 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed in the normal display color (white in this example), and the normal sound is won from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound is output (see steps 052IWS325, S326).

Next, during the high probability / second KT state, a small hit occurs and a game ball wins in the special winning opening, and a suggestion effect at the time of small hit winning is produced based on the winning of the game ball in the special winning opening. It is assumed that the execution of is decided. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (G), the winning display 052IW013 (in this example, the character display of "+10") is displayed according to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect, and the speaker. From 8L and 8R, a winning sound corresponding to the type of the determined small hit winning suggestion effect is output (see steps 052IWS323 and S324). For example, when the small hit winning suggestion effect A is executed, the winning display is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and the winning sound of the sound A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, it is assumed that the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2666 during the high probability / second KT state and the number of prize balls reaches 2666. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-58 (H), the character display 052IW014 such as "2666 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed (see step 052IWS360).

In this example, the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect F is executed is shown. For example, when the execution of the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is decided, the image display device 5 displays "2456". A character display such as "OVER" is displayed, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect D is executed. Further, for example, when it is decided to execute the prize ball number display suggestion effect E, a character display such as "2555 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5, and the prize ball number display suggestion effect E is executed.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-57 and 10-58, although the illustration is omitted, for example, the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is determined based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 1000. In that case, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER", and the prize ball number emphasizing effect A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect B is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 2000, a character display such as "2000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect C is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 3000, a character display such as "3000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect C is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect D is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 4000, a character display such as "4000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasis effect D is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of the prize ball number emphasizing effect E is decided based on the fact that the number of prize balls reaches 5000, a character display such as "5000 OVER" is displayed on the image display device 5. , The prize ball number emphasizing effect E is executed.

In this example, the number of prize balls has reached 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 (in other words, a small hit during a big hit game or a high probability / second KT state). Although the case where the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed at different selection ratios according to the total of the game values given by the above, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, depending on the number of small hits that occurred during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state, the prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F are performed at different selection ratios. May be configured to perform, and various aspects are conceivable.

Next, the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed will be described. FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation that results in a jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128A).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 10-59 (B). When this is done, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128A and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (C). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, the variation display of the second special symbol is a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation in this example). In the case of a jackpot fluctuation of (big hit, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 2R probability variation jackpot), as shown in FIG. 10-59 (D), even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1128B).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is a jackpot fluctuation that is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot in this example), the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. When this is done, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1128B and step 052IWS1129B).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-59 (F), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

The control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed is not limited to the mode shown in this example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed will be described.

(Modification example 1)
FIG. 10-60 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first modification. In FIG. 10-60, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1127A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the first modification, the determination process of step 052IWS1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129A as it is, and transmits the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-60, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-61 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the first modification. In FIG. 10-61, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1127B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the first modification, the determination processing of step 052IWS1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 does not exist. ..

In the first modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the CPU 103 proceeds to the process of step S1129B as it is, and transmits the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 052IWS1129B). In FIG. 10-61, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the first modification.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (A), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127A and step 052IWS1129A).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol that becomes a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (B), Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See N in IWS1127A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-62 (C), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly missed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is a normal jackpot. The stop display is displayed (see N in step 052IWS1127B and step 052IWS1129B).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol that is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-62 (D). Even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See N in IWS1127B).

(Modification 2)
FIG. 10-63 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the second modification. In FIG. 10-63, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1126A are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 10-19, but in the modified example 2, the determination process of steps 052IWS1127A and S1128A shown in FIG. 10-19 is used. Alternatively, the process of step 052IWS1127C is included.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the first special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). In FIG. 10-63, the process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

FIG. 10-64 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the second modification. In FIG. 10-64, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1126B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 2, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1127B and S1128B shown in FIG. Instead, it includes the process of step 052IWS1127D.

In the second modification, if the variation display of the second special symbol being executed is a big hit, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the variable display of the second special symbol being executed is not a big hit, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). In addition, in FIG. 10-64, the process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

FIG. 10-65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 2.

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the first special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (A), the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the first fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the first fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120A, step 052IWS1120A, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127C).

On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (B), When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127C and step 052IWS1129A).

If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit, is the fluctuation display of the second special symbol a jackpot fluctuation that becomes a probability variation jackpot? As shown in FIG. 10-65 (C), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, regardless of whether the jackpot fluctuation is usually a jackpot. Specifically, during the small hit game, the update of the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small hit game is completed, the value of the bonus control process flag is updated again to the value corresponding to the bonus control normal process (step S120), and the update of the second fluctuation time timer is restarted (step 052IWS1120B, step 052IWS1120B, Step 052 See Y in IWS1127D).

On the other hand, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol which is a miss or a small hit, as shown in FIG. 10-65 (D). When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (see N in step 052IWS1127D and step 052IWS1129B).

Further, as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol, other than those shown in the modification 1 and the modification 2, for example, the deviation is lost. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the forced loss is stopped, while the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a small hit is performed. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol which is the 10R probability variation jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the 2R probability variation jackpot is obtained. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation may be continued.

Further, for example, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the normal state (low probability / low base state), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed is off and fluctuates. Either the small hit fluctuation or the big hit fluctuation may be configured to stop forcibly. With such a configuration, in this example, if the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed in the low probability / high base state, the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed (see FIG. 10-29), but 50 times. When the fluctuation display is finished and the transition to the low probability / low base state is performed, 1 to 4 second hold memories are accumulated, and if there is a second hold memory that becomes a big hit, the forced loss stop is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit at an unintended timing. In particular, in a game machine configured to be controllable to the KT state as in this example, by performing a right-handed operation in the normal state (low probability / low base state), the second start winning opening is easy to win. It is also possible to make a start prize and display the variation of the second special symbol, and at the same time, let the first start prize opening win the start and display the variation of the first special symbol. It is effective as a preventive measure for the method.

As described above, various modes can be considered as a control method when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the other special symbol while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed.

(Modification 3)
In addition, the feature unit 052IW controls to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbols by the same control in the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. Although the case (see FIG. 10-59) is shown, different controls may be used. FIG. 10-66 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 3. In the modified example 3, the first special symbol variation process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19. In FIG. 10-66, the processing of steps 052IWS1120B to S1125B is the same as those processing shown in FIG. 10-22, but in the modified example 3, the determination processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B shown in FIG. 10-22 is performed. not exist. Therefore, in the third modification, unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A (N in step 052IWS1125B), the CPU 103 ends the process as it is.

FIG. 10-67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control of the variation display when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol in the modified example 3.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67 (A) and 10-67 (C), in the modified example 3, a small hit is displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol, which is a miss, a small hit, or a probability variation large hit. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, as in FIGS. 10-59 (A) and 10-59 (C). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-67 (D) and (F), the small hit symbol is stopped in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol which is a miss, a small hit, or a probabilistic big hit. When it is displayed, similarly to FIGS. 10-59 (D) and (F), the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (B), in the modified example 3, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. In the same manner as in FIG. 10-59 (B), when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the first special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed as an off symbol.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-67 (E), in the modified example 3, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. In, unlike FIG. 10-59 (E), the variation display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-67, in the modified example 3, the variation display of the special symbol is forcibly removed and forced by the symbol when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. The control to display the stop is different.

In the third modification, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the small hit symbol is forcibly stopped and stopped, while the normal jackpot is normally hit. When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is continued, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, conversely, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is a normal jackpot, the fluctuation display is continued, while the normal jackpot is displayed. If the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol, it may be configured to forcibly stop. Also, for example, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot), the forced loss is lost. On the other hand, if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that becomes a big hit (regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot), it fluctuates. It may be configured to continue the display. In this way, the control for forced loss stop may be different depending on whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in some form.

(Modification example 4)
FIG. 10-68 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the modified example 4. In FIGS. 10-68, the processes of steps 052IWS1120A to S1128A are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that is neither the 10R probability variation jackpot nor the 6R probability variation jackpot (that is, the 6R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128A, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 052IWS1131A). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to send the first forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129A). The process of step 052IWS1130A is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-19.

In the fourth modification, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131A is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the second special symbol during the variation display of the first special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the first special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the first special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

FIG. 10-69 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation processing in the modified example 4. In FIG. 10-69, the processes of steps 052IWS1120B to S1128B are similar to those processes shown in FIGS. 10-22.

In the fourth modification, when the variation display of the first special symbol that does not become a 10R probability variation jackpot, a 6R probability variation jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot (that is, a 2R normal jackpot) is being executed in step 052IWS1128B, the CPU 103 Checks whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 052IWS1131B). If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the process ends as it is. If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 052IWS1129B). The process of step 052IWS1130B is the same as the process shown in FIG. 10-22.

In the modified example 4, when the determination process of step 052IWS1131B is executed, the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display of the first special symbol during the variation display of the second special symbol which is usually a big hit. The variation display of the second special symbol is not uniformly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol when the probability change state is in progress. On the other hand, even during the variable display of the second special symbol, which is usually a big hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is continued even if the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, unless it is in the probability variation state.

In the modified example 4, a case is shown in which control is performed to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the probability change flag is set (whether or not it is in the probability change state), but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured to control to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol depending on whether or not the special figure time reduction flag is set. Further, for example, the control may be configured to forcibly stop and display the off symbol only when the high probability / low base state (high probability flag is on and high base flag is off). In this way, any form may be used as long as it is configured to forcibly control the stop display with a detached symbol according to the current gaming state.

In addition, when the control is configured to forcibly stop and display the out-of-order symbol only in the high probability / low base state as described above, it is possible to prevent a normal big hit in the variable display of one of the identification information. It is possible to prevent the second KT state (small hit RUSH) from being interrupted.

As described above, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. is there. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Then, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the small hit winning suggestion effect) can be executed in response to the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific area (for example, the special winning opening). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

Specifically, in this example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit winning based on the fact that the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). However, since the frequency of winning the special winning opening is particularly high during the small hit RUSH, it is possible to pay attention to the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect at the time of the small hit prize), and improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect. be able to.

In this example, a setting suggestion effect (in this example, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize) is executed based on a game ball winning a special winning opening as a specific area. I can't be limited. For example, even if the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A, variable winning ball device 6B), the general winning opening 10, and the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening as a specific area. Good. Further, as a specific area, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the entry of the game ball into the out port. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates such as the passing gate 41 as a specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") having different advantages for the player. In addition, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) that is a state different from the advantageous state. It is possible to control a special state (for example, a KT state) in which value is easily given. Further, the setting suggestion effect (for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect) can be executed, and the ease of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the length of the period controlled to the special state (for example, FIG. 10-43). As shown in, when the number of prize balls reaches 456, the prize ball number display suggestion effect A can be executed with a 3% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 555, the prize balls have a 2% probability. The number display suggestion effect B can be executed, and when the number of prize balls reaches 666, the prize ball number display suggestion effect C can be executed with a 1% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2456, 5 The prize ball number display suggestion effect D can be executed with a% probability, and when the number of prize balls reaches 2555, the prize ball number display suggestion effect E can be executed with a 3% probability, and the number of prize balls is 2666. When the number is reached, there is a 2% chance that the prize ball number display suggestion effect F can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect.

In this example, the timing at which the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666 as "the length of the period controlled by the special state" (in other words, The case where the prize ball number display suggestion effect is executed during the period until a certain game value is given) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "length of the period controlled to the special state" is controlled to the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit game state) or the special state (in this example, the small hit game state). It may be the length of the period to be used, or it may be the total length of these periods.

When the length of the period controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is used as the "length of the period controlled to the special state", the length of the period from the fanfare to the ending of the jackpot game is used. Alternatively, the length of the period of only the round game during the big hit game may be used. In this case, for example, the longer the period from the fanfare to the ending of the big hit game, the higher the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. Further, for example, in the case of a big hit with a small number of rounds during the big hit game, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than the big hit with a large number of rounds.

Further, for example, as "the length of the period controlled by the special state", the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state are used. Depending on the situation, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. In this case, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of small hits increases, or the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate as the number of executions of the variable display increases. .. Further, for example, the prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate at the timing when the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) ends, and various as "the length of the period controlled by the special state". Is conceivable.

Generally, in a game machine, when the number of prize balls reaches a certain number and a display such as "XXXXXX OVER" is displayed, "1000 OVER" of the prize ball number emphasis effect shown in this example or It is displayed in units that are limited to some extent, such as displaying in units of 1000 prize balls, such as displaying "2000 OVER". On the other hand, the prize ball number display suggestion effect shown in this example is a timing different from the usual timing when the number of prize balls reaches 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, 2666. Since it is executed in, it is possible to expect a high setting while giving a sense of discomfort to the occurrence timing of the prize ball number display suggestion effect, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state). Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in response to the control to the special state (for example, a small hit occurs during the high probability / second KT state and the game ball wins the special winning opening. Based on what you have done, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect when winning a small hit and a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control to the special state.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the special winning opening. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at the start of the small hit game during the small hit fluctuation or when the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to the open state. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the small hit notification mode when a small hit occurs. In this way, any form may be used as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the control of the small hit.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17) are played when the game is controlled in an advantageous state and when the game is controlled in a special state. The medium (for example, a game ball) can be controlled into an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter or impossible-entry non-easy state (for example, a closed state). Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in response to the variable means being controlled to the easy-to-enter state (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened, which is large. Based on the fact that a game ball has been won in the winning opening or the special winning opening, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect of displaying the number of prize balls). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the control of the variable means.

In this example, when the setting suggestion effect (in this example, the small hit prize suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect) is executed based on the game ball winning in the large prize opening or the special prize opening. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 17 is controlled to be in the open state and the opening effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the effect mode of the opening effect. It may be configured as follows. It suffices as long as the setting suggestion effect is executed in response to the fact that the variable means is controlled to the easy-to-enter state in some form.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, when the control of the game state is switched (for example, at the start or end of the big hit game, when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). ), The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the right-handed display is changed in step 052IWS624). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the switching of the control of the gaming state.

In this example, "when the control of the game state is switched" is set at the start or end of the jackpot game, or when shifting from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). Although the case where the suggestion effect is configured to be feasible is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the production period when shifting to the big hit game during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), or shifting from the big hit game to the high base state (high probability / first KT state or low probability / first KT state). The setting suggestion effect may be configured to be feasible during the effect period. Further, for example, a gaming machine configured to shift to a high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) based on executing a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during a high base state or a predetermined number of small hits. In the effect period when shifting from the high base state to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be executable, and various as "when the control of the game state is switched". Is conceivable.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed by changing the display mode of the right-handed display or the left-handed display is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by changing the effect of the fanfare effect at the start of the big hit and the effect of the ending effect at the end of the big hit, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, according to the number of times of control to the special state in the special state, the total of the game values given by the special state in the special state, or the number of times of executing the variable display in the special state. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect with different selection ratios (for example, prizes with different selection ratios depending on the number of prize balls reaching 456, 555, 666, 2456, 2555, or 2666. The ball number display suggestion effects A to F are executed, or, for example, according to the number of small hits generated during the high probability / second KT state and the number of executions of the variation display executed during the high probability / second KT state. , The prize ball number display suggestion effects A to F may be executed at different selection ratios.) Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the number of times of control to the special state, the total number of game values, or the number of times of execution of the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as special states, an advantageous special state (for example, a second KT state) and a disadvantageous special state (for example, a first KT state) that is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the advantageous special state. Can be controlled. Further, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect by different selection ratios when the game medium passes through the specific area during the advantageous special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area during the disadvantageous special state (for example). Only when a small hit is made and a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state, the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect in relation to the type of special state.

In this example, the case where the small hit winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed only when the game ball wins in the special winning opening during the second KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, even if a game ball wins in the special winning opening during the first KT state, a suggestion effect at the time of a small hit prize or a suggestion effect for displaying the number of prize balls can be executed, and the game ball is placed in the special winning opening during the second KT state. Depending on whether the player wins a prize or a game ball wins in the special prize opening during the 1st KT state, it is possible to execute a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect at different rates. It may be configured. Further, for example, even when an irregular game ball is won in the special winning opening during the non-KT state, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed. ..

In the case of the above configuration, if a prize is awarded to the special winning opening in the 1st KT state (high base state) or an irregular winning occurs, or if a winning is generated to the special winning opening during the 2nd KT state. In comparison with, a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate, or a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect may be performed. It may be configured to run.

In this feature unit 052IW, the value of the prize ball counter and the number of prize balls are displayed during the big hit game based on the 10R probability variation jackpot, the 6R probability variation jackpot, and the 6R normal jackpot and during the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH). Is updated, and the value of the prize ball counter is not updated during the jackpot game based on the 2R probability variation hit and the 2R normal jackpot and during the high base state (high probability / 1st KT state, low probability / 1st KT state). (The prize ball counter is not reset), and in principle, the prize ball number display is hidden, and the 50 times fluctuation display is completed in the low probability / first KT state to the normal state (low probability / low base state). The case where the value of the prize ball counter is controlled to be reset at the time of transition is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. The value of the prize ball counter may be updated even during the big hit game based on the 2R probability variation big hit or the 2R normal big hit.

In this example, by configuring as described above, for example, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) is terminated and the high base state (high probability / first KT state, low probability / first KT) is completed. If a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs during the high base state and then shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH) again, the prize during the previous small hit RUSH. The value of the prize ball counter can be updated and the prize ball number display can be displayed while the number of balls is inherited.

In addition, not limited to the mode of displaying the number of prize balls as shown in this example, for example, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs and the player shifts to the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH), the high probability / second KT state (Small hit RUSH) may be set as one section and the big hit game immediately before the section may be set as one section, and the total number of prize balls in the section may be totaled and the total value may be displayed. Further, for example, the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value may be executed by changing the display mode (display color in this example) of the aggregated value.

Further, in the feature unit 052IW, as a "setting suggestion effect", a small hit winning suggestion effect or a prize ball number display suggestion effect is performed in a manner in which the current set value suggests one of the set values "1" to "6". Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, instead of suggesting the current set value, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a manner of suggesting whether or not the setting change has been made to change the set value when the power is turned on to the game machine. Good. As such, the "setting suggestion effect" may be any form of suggestion regarding the setting.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel. When a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and the variable display display result is special. When the display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Further, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probabilistic jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the first specific display result is derived and displayed. It is more advantageous for the player than the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, it is controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game is completed). Further, while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is the variable display corresponding to the first specific display result, the special display result is displayed in the variable display of the other identification information. The display result of the variable display of one of the identification information is not derived and displayed (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first 2 The variable display of the special symbol is continuously executed). Further, during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information. Based on the derivation display, the variable display of the identification information of one of them is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is an outlier symbol). Forcibly stopped and displayed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

Specifically, when the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of one of the identification information results in a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) even though the transition to the second KT state (small hit RUSH) or probability variation state has occurred. The second KT state (small hit RUSH) or the probabilistic change state will end immediately, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decline. On the other hand, if the variable display corresponding to the remaining hold of the identification information on one side is forcibly forcibly removed and the symbol is stopped and displayed (forced off), even the variable display that is a probable change jackpot will be forcibly removed. As a result, the game value given to the player in the advantageous state (big hit game state) is reduced, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, while the fluctuation display that is a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is forcibly removed, the fluctuation display that is a probability variation jackpot is extended (interruption of measurement of fluctuation time). , While suppressing the decrease in the game value given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In this example, as an aspect of "not stopping the variable display of one of the identification information", the update of the first variable time timer or the second variable time timer is interrupted, and the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed. Has been shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), and the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that was interrupted after the end of the small hit game is resumed. You may. Anything that does not completely stop the variable display in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to the special state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value is easily given by the special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the first specific display result is controlled to a specific state based on the derivation display (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the big hit game based on the probability change big hit), and the second specific display result is derived and displayed. Based on this, it is controlled to a non-specific state (for example, it is not controlled to a probabilistic state after the end of a big hit game based on a normal big hit). Therefore, it is possible to realize control considering whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, it is possible to control the specific state based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the specific region (for example, V region 052IW104) while being controlled to the advantageous state. Then, when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the game medium passes through the specific area at a higher rate when the second specific display result is derived and displayed, as compared with the case where the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (See Fig. 10-11). Therefore, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the special display result can be derived and displayed regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (). See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the first identification is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information. The variable display of information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (B)). Further, when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information, the second identification information is displayed. Control is not performed to derive and display the variable display of the above with a predetermined display result (see FIG. 10-67 (E)). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change)) that is different from the advantageous state and is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The state)) can be controlled. Further, the variable display executing means is a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and is a variable display corresponding to the second specific display result when controlled to the specific state. Based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with the predetermined display result (FIGS. 10-68 and 10-). 69). Further, when controlled to the non-specific state, during execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, When the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the other identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (see FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69). ). Therefore, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first start area (for example, the first start winning opening). ) Can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is variably displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). It is possible. Further, a variable means (for example, a special variable prize) that can be changed into a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which the game medium cannot enter or cannot enter (for example, a closed state). A ball device 17) is provided. Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state having a lower advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) For example, it can be controlled to either the small hit game state), and the variable means is controlled to the first state when it is controlled to the special state. Further, the first starting area is provided so that the game medium moving on a predetermined path (for example, the left area of the game area) can enter the moving path in which the game medium can move, and the variable means is out of the moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, the area to the right of the game area) is provided so as to be accessible. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the specific route, and the first identification information is variably displayed. When the special state is controlled after the execution of, the specific notification is not executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-56 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in the feature unit 052IW, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side can be executed. It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than the small hit type on the 2nd special symbol side, and when the small hit is made in the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special If the variable display of the symbol is forcibly removed and stopped, if the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is practically Although it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the special winning opening, the player wastes the game ball, and on the contrary, a disadvantageous launch promotion notification is performed, which is not preferable. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, while the right-handed notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the first reserved storage means (for example, the first reserved storage buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the reserved storage and the variable display of the second identification information. The information is provided as a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) that can be stored as hold storage. Further, when the specific display result (for example, the jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the display result of the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state) is set. It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) is displayed. It is possible to control the small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency at which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one of the variable displays when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel. As the display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly terminated, and the reserved memory can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a predetermined value can be given when the special state is controlled (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the large winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in FIGS. 10-56 (1) and (2)) and the first specific notification are more visible. It is possible to execute a highly likely second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 052IW007 displayed in FIG. 10-56 (1)). When controlled to an advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 10-56 (1)), and after the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the special state is controlled. At that time, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 10-56 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state, a higher ratio is more advantageous than when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then controlled to the special state. It is controlled to a special state of a low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, the specific notification is executed (see FIGS. 10-56 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern) at least corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained. , Forcibly stop and display the non-reach off symbol). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognition of being controlled to a special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved memory stored by the second reserved storage means can be smoothly digested.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium (for example, a regulation piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) is provided on the upstream side of the variable means in the specific route. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second identification information from being targeted at the timing when the control to the special state is executed after the variable display of the second identification information is executed at the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the capture measures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a passage member for moving the game ball so as to meander left and right is provided as a delay means on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area. You may.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the effect is produced based on the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the information from the game control means. It includes an effect control means for controlling (for example, an effect control CPU 120). Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed display 26) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means executes a specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, right-handed notification is executed during the jackpot game regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left large winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right large winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the game area. If a big hit is made by the variable display of the symbol, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if a big hit is made by the variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to a game machine configured as described above, if a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game, while the variable display of the first special symbol is used. If a big hit occurs, the right-handed notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if a jackpot is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left-handed notification may be executed during the jackpot game. That is, the specific notification executing means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right-handed winning opening) is controlled to an advantageous state of the type to be controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit is obtained in the variable display of the first special symbol, a left-handed notification is executed during the big-hit game to prevent the player from accidentally performing a right-handed operation. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player.

Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, a case where right-handed notification is executed even in the KT state is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when the second start winning opening is applied to a game machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. May be good.

Further, in this example, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 only during the big hit game, right-handed notification is executed by displaying the right-handed display 052IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), when executing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to lighting the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37, The right-handed display 052IW007 may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 to execute the right-handed notification. Alternatively, in this case, for example, during the ending period at the end of the big hit game, the right-handed display 052IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed display 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37. May be configured to execute right-handed notification.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the relatively large size right-handed display 052IW007 as shown in FIG. 10-56 (1), the image display device 5 displays a symbol display (for example, a right-pointing triangular display) indicating right-handedness. May be configured to enable right-handed notification.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball devices are provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the small hit type, and the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a small hit. The selection ratio of the small hit type may be different depending on whether the case is a small hit or a small hit is obtained by the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a small number of prize balls. , When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the small hit type (or the small hit type in the open mode with a high winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device having a large number of prize balls can be easily selected. It may be configured as.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol, a right-handed notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (2)), and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed. In the case where a small hit occurs, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 10-56 (3)), but when a small hit occurs in the variation display of the second special symbol. May be configured so that right-handed notification may not be performed. For example, if a small hit occurs when the second special symbol variation display is executed in a situation where a left-handed operation should be performed in a normal state, the right-handed notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the non-specific state. In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and when controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 10-3 and 10). See -4). Therefore, appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in ball ejection performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in this feature unit 052IW, by making the number of special judgment values common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is common), it is possible to prevent the difference in the degree of advantage from becoming excessively large depending on the set value. However, it prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of becoming a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is increased. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in a game machine that can be controlled to a special state.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, as special states, there are a first special state (for example, a first KT state) and a second special state (for example, a second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to execute a special suggestion effect (for example, a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-55) corresponding to the advantage of the special state. Therefore, by suggesting the advantage of the special state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, a predetermined display result (for example, a missed symbol) different from the specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived as the variable display display result. When the variable display to be displayed is executed, the set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value (for example, the set value suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 10-54) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of the way is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or the set value suggestion effect during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of the special state is determined by using the special type determination value (for example, the small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-6). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of small hit types is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, the small hit type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R normal jackpot). In addition, the type of advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-5). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in this feature unit 052IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the jackpot type is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming excessively high in gambling.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the jackpot type determination ratio may be different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be different depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display mode is determined by using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variable pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-10). Therefore, more appropriate playability can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 052IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from growing and prevents it from becoming excessively gambling.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous in factors other than the big hit lottery. It is not preferable because the degree (difference in ball ejection performance) is greatly different, but in this feature unit 052IW, by making the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-10, the case where the fluctuation pattern allocation is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, by making the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern different depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" and providing a difference in the fluctuation time, the fluctuation efficiency is made different depending on the set value. It may be configured so that the advantage varies depending on the value.

Further, according to the present feature unit 052IW, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display display result, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Is. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. It is decided that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the variable display and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. A predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of loss) is included. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, the number of special determination values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable change state) and a specific state (for example, a probable change state) which is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination value corresponding to the specific state of all the set values (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the second identification information in the specific state can be displayed in a variable manner. The corresponding determination value includes a predetermined determination value (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, a KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result is increased. Further, when a variable display that is controlled to a special state and a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed is executed, a set value suggestion effect (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 10-54) that suggests a set value is executed. Value suggestion effect) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the feature unit 052IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Further, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state (for example, the small hit game state) different from the advantageous state. Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). In addition, the judgment values include a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display a specific display result as a variable display display result, and a special display result as a variable display display result. Is included as a special determination value (for example, a determination value for small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it is possible to set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values "1" to "6") in which the number of specific determination values is different. Further, among the judgment values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information, the number of special judgment values is the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 10-4), and the judgment corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information. The number of special judgment values differs between the value and the judgment value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game while realizing appropriate game playability.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the game machines shown in the following (means A1) to (means A6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU 103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Is the identification of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information while the variable display of the identification information is being executed. The first control that does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of information (for example, the update of the first fluctuation time timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol continues. (Executed), the second control (for example, the outlier symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the first special symbol or the first special symbol)) that derives and displays the variable display of one of the identification information with a predetermined display result (for example, the outlier symbol). The variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed with the missing symbol))), and the first control and the second control are performed according to the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B depending on the determination result of steps 052IWS1128A and S1128B. In the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is based on the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. Therefore, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B are executed. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means A2) In means A1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is likely to be given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is Specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means A4) In any of means A1 to means A3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). A control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) is provided, and the specific state control means has a specific area (for example, a portion) when it is controlled in an advantageous state. Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball) through the V region 052IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is in step 052IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, in FIG. 10-11 (2), the game medium passes through the specific region. As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to means A4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, game control). The microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4), which is a variable display of the first identification information and a second specific display result. While the variable display corresponding to is being executed, the variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a modified example). In 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A and S1130A when N in step 052IWS1128A. See FIG. 10-67 (B)), and the second identification information is variable. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the second identification information is displayed with the predetermined display result. Control for derivation and display is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67. (E) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to means A5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable when controlled to the non-specific state. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the other identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148127), the display result of the variable display is advantageous with respect to the control of deriving and displaying the variable display of the identification information with the predetermined display result (forced stop). It was not possible to realize control considering the degree. Therefore, for the purpose of providing the feature unit 052IW with a game machine capable of realizing control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, the game machines shown in the following (means B1) to (means B6) are shown below. The characteristic composition of is also disclosed.

(Means B1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and has a variable display of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification information (for example, a second special symbol). A variable display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S25A and S25B in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of executing the variable display of the symbol) in parallel, and a display of the variable display. As a result, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) Specifically, a special state (for example, a portion in which steps S122 to S125 are executed in CPU103) and a special state (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the advantageous state when the special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. For example, a variable display execution means including a special state control means (for example, a portion for executing steps S126 to S128 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) capable of controlling a small hit game state). Can derive and display the special display result regardless of whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100). (Specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS64A and S64B. See FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4.), Variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information. The first control (for example, the first fluctuation time) in which the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is not derived and displayed based on the derivation display of the special display result in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of The update of the timer or the second fluctuation time timer is interrupted, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is continuously executed), and the variable display of the identification information of one of them is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example,). The second control (for example, the out-of-order symbol is displayed and stopped (for example, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the out-of-order symbol)) is performed. It is feasible, and which of the first control and the second control is executed differs depending on the display result derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically). CPU103) is step 052 Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, S1130B are executed according to the determination results of IWS1128A and S1128B. For example, in the first modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1127A and S1127B. For example, in the second modification, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) executes steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A, S1129B, and S1130B according to the determination results of steps 052IWS1130C and S1130D. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display.

(Means B2) In means B1, a special state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a second KT state) in which a game value (for example, a prize ball) due to a special state is easily given. Specifically, the CPU 103) may be configured to include a portion for executing step 052IWS2208). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by providing a situation in which the game value due to the special state is easily given.

(Means B3) In the means B1 or the means B2, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol), and the advantageous state is A specific state control means (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is different and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state as compared with a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the portion that executes step 052IWS2206) in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is provided, and the specific state control means controls the specific state based on the fact that the first specific display result is derived and displayed. (For example, the probability change state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot), and the non-specific state is controlled based on the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the end of the jackpot game based on the normal jackpot). It may be configured so that it is not controlled to a probabilistic state later). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not it is controlled to a specific state.

(Means B4) In any one of means B1 to means B3, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , A specific state that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The specific state control means includes a control means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the specific state control means has a specific area (for example, for example) when it is controlled in an advantageous state. Based on the passage of the game medium (for example, a game ball) through the V region 052IW104), it is possible to control the game to a specific state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) is in step 052IWS2404. (S2405, S2204 to S2206 are executed), when the first specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio is higher when the second specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state than when the second specific display result is derived and displayed. (As shown in FIG. 10-11 (1), in the jackpot game based on the probability variation jackpot, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 is long. On the other hand, in FIG. 10-11 (2). As shown in the above, in a big hit game based on a normal big hit, the opening period of the V region opening / closing plate 052IW101 may be extremely short.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control in consideration of whether or not the game medium easily passes through the specific area.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to means B4, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). The variable display executing means is based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the second identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the first identification information. , The variable display of the first identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is set to N in step 052IWS1128A, steps 052IWS1129A, S1130A. (See FIG. 10-67 (B).), The special display in the variable display of the first identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of the second identification information. When the result is derived and displayed, the control for deriving and displaying the variable display of the second identification information with the predetermined display result is not performed (for example, in the modification 3, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)). Does not perform the processing of steps 052IWS1126B to S1128B. See FIGS. 10-66 and 10-67 (E).). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control considering whether the first identification information is the variable display or the second identification information is the variable display.

(Means B6) In any of the means B1 to the means B5, the specific display result includes a first specific display result (for example, a probability variation jackpot symbol) and a second specific display result (for example, a normal jackpot symbol). , The derivation display of the first specific display result has a higher advantage for the player than the derivation display of the second specific display result (for example, the probability change state is controlled after the jackpot game ends). Specific state control that is different from the advantageous state and can be controlled to a specific state (for example, a high probability state (probability change state)) that is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than a non-specific state (for example, a low probability state). The variable display executing means includes means (for example, a portion for executing step 052IWS2206 in the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)), and the variable display executing means provides the first identification information and the first identification information when controlled to a specific state. Based on the fact that the special display result was derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, which is the variable display of one of the second identification information. Then, the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, in the modification 4, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) is Y in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. Step 052 IWS1129A, S1130A is executed. See FIGS. 10-68 and 10-69), the identification information of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is variable when controlled to the non-specific state. If the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display corresponding to the second specific display result, the variable display of the one identification information is displayed as the predetermined display result. (For example, in the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) does not shift to steps 052IWS1129A and S1129B when N in steps 052IWS1131A and S1131B. -68, see FIG. 10-69.). According to such a configuration, in addition to the degree of advantage of the display result of the variable display, it is possible to realize the control in consideration of whether or not the control is performed in a specific state.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 052IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 21TM to form a game machine. For example, a configuration in which the set value shown in the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW to enable the set value suggestion effect, or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed. , Right-handed notification can be executed, over-winning suggestion effect can be executed, small hit winning suggestion effect can be executed, and prize ball number display suggestion effect can be executed. You may do it. Further, for example, a configuration in which the set value indicated by the feature unit 21TM can be changed is applied to the feature unit 052IW, and a small hit occurs in the variation display of the other special symbol while the variation display of one special symbol is being executed. In that case, the variable display of one of the special symbols may be forcibly stopped and displayed or the variable display may be continued by the symbol.

Further, when the configuration shown in the feature unit 021TM is applied, as shown in FIG. 9-5, the setting value may be suggested by changing the mode of the ending effect. In this case, for example, in the ending effect, a mode transition notification including a small hit RUSH or a chance mode may be executed, a card forgetting prevention notification such as a prepaid card may be executed, or a maker logo display may be displayed. It is configured to suggest the set value by configuring and changing the mode transition notification, the card forgetting prevention notification, the display mode of the maker logo display, and the display mode of the image to be displayed at the same time. You may.

[Explanation of feature 18TM]
Next, the feature unit 18TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above-mentioned (Explanation of the feature unit 052IW), the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this feature unit 18TM, the gaming state is controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state), and a low probability and first KT state (low probability / first KT state: time saving). When controlled by the state), when controlled by the high probability and the first KT state (high probability / first KT state; probability variation state), and when controlled by the high probability and the second KT state (high probability / second KT state: small hit RUSH). It may be controlled by the state).

(Relationship between game state and production pattern and production mode)
First, each game state (low accuracy / non-KT state: normal state, low accuracy / first KT state: time saving state, high accuracy / first KT state: probability change state, and high accuracy / second KT state: small hit RUSH state) , The relationship between each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, and second small symbol) and each effect mode (day mode, night mode, cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 are smaller than the decorative symbols and indicate whether or not the special symbols are variablely displayed and the display result of the special symbols. Is called a small design. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed from the left in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and so on. And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5 in which the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed as the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left. The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The display area of the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 is smaller than that of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 has a smaller display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, and the visibility of the second small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

11-1 and 11-2 are explanatory views showing specific examples of decorative symbols, small symbols, and background images corresponding to the gaming state. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and there are cases where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the second special symbol. Which of the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display is executed corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the game state. In the following description, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is referred to as the main symbol, and among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the decorative symbol is not supported. The special symbol is called a sub symbol.

That is, the state in which the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is a state in which the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition to the variable display of one small symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, In 5c2 and 5r2, the variation display of the second small symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the state in which the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition to executing the variable display of the two small symbols, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, In 5c1 and 5r1, the variation display of the first small symbol is executed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, the "low probability / non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as the normal state) corresponding to the low probability low base state and the "low probability high base state" corresponding to the low probability high base state High accuracy / first KT state (sometimes called time saving state), high accuracy / first KT state (sometimes called probability variation state) corresponding to high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state. There is a corresponding "high accuracy / second KT state" (sometimes referred to as a small hit RUSH state). When the gaming state is controlled to (i) low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the gaming state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy / first KT state, when it is controlled to (iii) high accuracy / first KT state, it is controlled to (iv) high accuracy / second KT state. If so, in each case, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the cases of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

FIG. 11-1 (A) shows the image display device 5 when the gaming state is the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed in. Further, in FIG. 11-1 (B), the image is displayed when the gaming state is the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image which is displayed on the apparatus 5. Further, in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state (probability variation state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image which is sometimes displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the gaming state is the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of the image which is displayed on the image display device 5 at the time of.

As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, a first hold display area for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 18TM010) is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. 18TM011 is provided, and a second hold display area 18TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold display 18TM020) is provided at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, the active display is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also the information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 18TM031 for displaying 18TM030 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display area 18TM011), and the image display device 5 A second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided on the right side of the screen (upper part of the second reserved display area 18TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, a first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 for displaying the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is provided, and the image A second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the display device 5.

Here, the number of objects (round image) corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011, and the second reserved display area 18TM021 corresponds to the second reserved storage number. A number of objects (round image) are displayed. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed numerically, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed numerically. To. The display range of the object in the first hold display area 18TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first hold storage number special display area 18TM015, and the first hold storage number is the first hold in the first hold display area 18TM011. It will be displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 18TM015. Further, the display range of the object in the second hold display area 18TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second hold storage number special display area 18TM025, and the second hold display area 18TM021 has the second hold storage number. 2 The number of reserved memories is displayed with higher visibility than the special display area 18TM025.

Further, in the first reserved display area 18TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state). ), The number of objects corresponding to the first reserved memory number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (Ii) Low accuracy / 1st KT state (time saving state), (iii) High accuracy / 1st KT state (probability variation state), and (iv) High accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state). (When), the object itself is hidden. In this way, in the first hold display area 18TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player can check the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 even in the gaming state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 18TM011. The number of first reserved memories can be grasped.

Further, in the second hold display area 18TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (ii) low probability / first KT state (time saving state). ), (Iii) High accuracy / 1st KT state (probability change state), and (iv) High accuracy / 2nd KT state (small hit RUSH state)), 2nd hold storage number When the number of objects is displayed, but the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability / non-KT state (normal state)). (When), the object itself is hidden. In this way, in the second hold display area 18TM021, an object corresponding to the second hold storage number is displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, the player can grasp the second reserved storage number by checking the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 even in the gaming state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second reserved display area 18TM021. Can be done.

Further, in the active display area 18TM031, an object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed regardless of the game state, and becomes a sub symbol. The object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the day mode. When the production mode is the daytime mode, a "daytime image" showing a daytime landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 4 and the second reserved memory number is 2, the variation display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub symbol The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "4" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "2" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four firsts are displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM011. Hold display 18TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the information corresponding to the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. ) Is being displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 11-1 (B) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state). When the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy / first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the night mode. When the production mode is the night mode, a "night image" representing the night landscape including the night sky and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first reserved memory number is 2 and the second reserved memory number is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second symbol which is the main symbol. The variable display of the special symbol is being executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM021. Hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. ) Is being displayed.

11-2 (C1) to 11-2 (C3) are diagrams showing a screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state, the player can select one of the effect modes from the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to any of the selected effect modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), a "cloudy image" showing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being the cloudy mode. .. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), a "rain image" showing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is used as a background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being the rain mode. Is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), corresponding to the production mode being the typhoon mode, the "typhoon" showing the landscape of the typhoon including clouds, wind and rain as the background image of the decorative pattern. "Image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) to (C3), when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the second reserved storage number is 4, the first special symbol is a sub symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM021. Hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. ) Is being displayed.

11-2 (D1) to 11-2 (D3) are views showing a screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the player can select one of the effect modes from the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to any of the selected effect modes.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), a "cloudy image" showing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being the cloudy mode. .. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), a "rain image" showing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain as a background image of a decorative pattern corresponding to the effect mode being the rain mode. Is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), corresponding to the production mode being the typhoon mode, the "typhoon" showing the landscape of the typhoon including clouds, wind and rain as the background image of the decorative pattern. "Image" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the first reserved storage number is 2 and the second reserved storage number is 4, the first special symbol is a sub symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is executed in parallel at the same time. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025, and four seconds are displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM021. Hold display 18TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 18TM031, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, and 5r1. The variable display of the small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. ) Is being displayed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C1) and 11-2 (D1), when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the numerical symbols (in this example, in this example) are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. "0" to "9") and a special symbol 18TM050 (in this example, a decorative symbol in which the characters "OPEN" are shown on an elliptical object, which is a decorative symbol for notifying the occurrence of a small hit) are included. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol consisting of only the numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9") is performed. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C2) and 11-2 (D2), when the effect mode is controlled to the rain mode, the numerical symbols (“0” in this example” are used in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A variable display of decorative symbols consisting only of ~ "9") is performed, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, a second consisting of only numerical symbols (in this example, "0" to "9"). A variable display of small symbols is performed.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (C3) and (D3), when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the numerical symbols (in this example, "0") are displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ”To“ 9 ”), the decorative symbol is variablely displayed, and in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the number symbol (in this example,“ 0 ”to“ 9 ”) is the only third. 2 Small symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

In the present embodiment, regardless of the game state and the effect mode, the symbols constituting the second small symbol are numerical symbols of "0" to "9", and the second small symbol is variablely displayed and stopped. The displayed area is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2. That is, in the present embodiment, the second small symbol that is variablely displayed is common regardless of the game state and the effect mode, and the area where the variable display is performed is also common.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The variable display mode of the second small symbol is the same as that of the second small symbol, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also the same. Further, regardless of the effect mode, the variable display mode of the second small symbol is common, and the variable display area of the second small symbol is also common. According to such a configuration, the period during which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the period during which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Since the display mode and display area of the second small symbol can be shared regardless of which effect mode is controlled, the player can accurately display the second small symbol even if the effect mode is switched. It becomes possible to grasp.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C1), the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D1), the gaming state is highly accurate. / In either case, the common "cloudy image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern in the case of being controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C2), the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D2), the gaming state is In either case, the common "rain image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, depending on whether the control is in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Further, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C3), the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), and as shown in FIG. 11-2 (D3), the gaming state is In either case, the common "typhoon image" can be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, depending on whether the control is in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the gaming state is highly accurate / first. Unlike the case where it is controlled to the 1KT state (probability change state), it corresponds to the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) at the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 is displayed. The special display 18TM100 includes the characters "RUSH" for notifying that it is in the small hit RUSH state, and the background image (cloudy image, any of the cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) at that time. It is superimposed on either the rain image or the typhoon image).

Here, the special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). An animation operation in which the characters "RUSH" included in the special display 18TM100 move within the area of the special display 18TM100 may be executed. For example, an animation operation in which the characters "RUSH" move from the upper left direction to the lower right direction in the area of the special display 18TM100 may be executed. By such an animation operation, the effect of the small hit RUSH state can be further enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D1) to (D3), the area where the special display 18TM100 is displayed at the upper right of the screen is the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2 in any of the production modes. It does not overlap with 5r2 and does not overlap with the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025. Similarly, the area where the special display 18TM100 at the lower left of the screen is displayed does not overlap with the active display area 18TM031 and does not overlap with the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the cloudy mode is controlled when the game state is controlled to either the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is possible, and the background image can be a "cloudy image". Further, when the game state is controlled to either the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the rain mode can be controlled and the background image can be changed to " It can be a "rain image". Further, when the game state is controlled to either the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the typhoon mode can be controlled and the background image can be changed to " It can be a typhoon image.

In this way, it is possible to control a common effect mode when controlled in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and when controlled in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Therefore, since it is possible to control the common production mode, it is possible to standardize the production data such as the background image. It is possible to control a common effect mode in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and execute an effect based on common effect data (for example, a background image). By making it possible, compared with the case where individual production modes (specific to the gaming state) are provided for the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), It is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the production data and reduce the development burden of the production data.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-2, the display mode of the first hold storage number in the first hold display area 18TM011 (first hold display mode) is the high probability / first KT state (probability change state). ) And the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), whichever mode is controlled, it is common. Further, the display mode of the second hold storage number in the second hold display area 18TM021 (mode of the second hold display) is also high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is common regardless of which production mode is controlled. Further, the display mode of the active display in the active display area 18TM031 is also controlled regardless of which of the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. It is common.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold display area 18TM011 is controlled in either the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The second hold display area 18TM021 is also common regardless of whether the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The active display area 18TM031 is also common regardless of whether the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

In this way, at least during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). , Regardless of which production mode is controlled, the display mode of the corresponding display (first hold display, second hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is standardized, and the corresponding display (corresponding display ( The area where the first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display) are displayed is shared. As a result, the player has a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and a period in which the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Therefore, even when the effect mode is changed, the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) can be easily grasped, and whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Can be easily grasped.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, a non-KT state (normal state), a low probability / first KT state (time saving state), and a high probability / first KT state (probability change). The display mode of the corresponding display (first hold display, second hold display, active display) is standardized between the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the corresponding display (first hold). The area where the display, the second hold display, and the active display) are displayed is shared. Not limited to such a form, with respect to one or both of the non-KT state (normal state) and the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the high accuracy / second KT The correspondence display may be displayed in a mode different from the state (small hit RUSH state), and is different from the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The corresponding display may be displayed in the area.

That is, in the high-accuracy state (high-accuracy / first KT state, high-accuracy / second KT state), the effect mode is shared between the first KT state and the second KT state, whereas the low-accuracy state (non-KT). In the state, low accuracy / first KT state), the display mode of the corresponding display in the low accuracy state is changed to the high accuracy state in correspondence with the control to the effect mode (day mode, night mode) different from the high accuracy state. The display mode of the corresponding display in the above may be different, and the display area of the corresponding display in the low accuracy state may be different from the display area of the corresponding display in the high accuracy state.

In this way, at least during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the period when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). It is preferable to standardize the display mode of the corresponding display regardless of which effect mode is controlled, and to standardize the area in which the corresponding display is displayed.

Not limited to such a form, the display mode (or display area) of the corresponding display may be different depending on which effect mode is controlled. However, there is a common effect between the period when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and the period when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). When controlled by the mode, the display mode (and display area) of the corresponding display shall be shared.

For example, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is set to the mode in which the characters "cloud" are shown on the round object, and the effect mode is set to the rain mode. If it is controlled, the corresponding display (active display, hold display) is set to the mode in which the characters "rain" are shown on the round object, and if the production mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, Correspondence display (active display, hold display) is a mode in which the characters "table" are shown on a round object. In this way, when the display mode of the corresponding display is different for each effect mode, the period during which the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and the game state are the high accuracy / second KT state. When the effect mode is controlled to be the same as the period controlled to (small hit RUSH state) (for example, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode), the display mode of the corresponding display is the same. Suppose there is (for example, the corresponding display is an image in which the letters "cloud" are shown on a round object).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display modes of the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 are non-KT state (normal state), low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), and high accuracy / first. It shall be common regardless of whether the game state is controlled to the 1KT state (probability change state) or the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, the display mode of the second reserved memory number in the second reserved memory number special display area 18TM025 is also a non-KT state (normal state), a low probability / first KT state (time saving state), and a high probability / first KT state (probability change state). ) And the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), whichever game state is controlled, it shall be common.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 has a non-KT state (normal state), a low probability / first KT state (time saving state), a high probability / first KT state (probability change state), and a high probability state. It is common regardless of which gaming state of the certainty / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled. In addition, the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 is also in the non-KT state (normal state), low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and high accuracy / second KT state. It is common regardless of which gaming state of (small hit RUSH state) is controlled.

As described above, the position of the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 in the screen and the display mode of the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 are based on the gaming state. It is also common regardless of the production mode. Further, the position of the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 on the screen and the display mode of the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are not related to the gaming state. Moreover, it is common regardless of the production mode. As a result, even when the effect corresponding to each effect mode is executed on the image display device 5, the player can accurately grasp the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved storages, the number of second reserved storages). It will be possible.

(Transition of game state)
In the present embodiment, in the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), it is mainly 9%. [10R probability variation jackpot] occurs at a rate of [10R probability variation jackpot], [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs at a rate of 56%, and [6R normal jackpot] occurs at a rate of 35%.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variation big hit] occurs in the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) occurs after the big hit game is completed. ). In addition, when [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the low probability / non-KT state (normal state), it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until this happens. In addition, when [6R normal jackpot] occurs in the low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), it shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the KT state (high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), the player Aiming at the right side of the game area, the game ball is launched (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-29, since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, the [10R probability variable big hit] or mainly at a rate of 15%. [2R probability variation jackpot], [6R probability variation jackpot] at a rate of 50%, and [2R normal jackpot] at a rate of 35%.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when a 10R probability variation jackpot or [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), the high accuracy / second KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game It shifts to the small hit RUSH state), and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until this happens. In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming [6R probability variation jackpot] is 50% in total (see FIG. 10-5), so that the probability is high once. In the first KT state (probability change state), the high probability / first KT state (probability change state) loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), it shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the low probability / first KT state (time saving state), the high accuracy / second KT occurs after the jackpot game is completed. It shifts to the state (small hit RUSH state), and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the low probability / first KT state (time saving state), it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until this happens. In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs in the low accuracy / 1st KT state (time saving state), it shifts to the low accuracy / 1st KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit occurs. The low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the fluctuation display of 50 times is completed. In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming [2R normal jackpot] is 35% (see FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / first KT state (time saving state) is reached, the low probability / first KT state (time saving state) loops at a rate of 35%. In addition, when [6R normal jackpot] or [2R normal jackpot] occurs and the probability is low / the first KT state (time saving state), and then 50 fluctuation displays are completed without the next jackpot occurring. To shift to a low accuracy / non-KT state (normal state), as shown in FIG. 10-29.

As shown in FIG. 10-29, when [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high accuracy / high accuracy / after the end of the jackpot game. It shifts to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs. In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of becoming [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] is 15% (FIG. 10-5 (D)). , (E)), once the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is reached, the high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) loops at a rate of 15%. In addition, when [6R probability variation jackpot] occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot The high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the occurrence of. In addition, when [2R normal big hit] occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit. The low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) is maintained until the occurrence of or the end of 50 fluctuation displays.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ratio of the game state controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) or the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) according to the jackpot type. Is different, and the game value (number of prize balls) finally given to the player differs greatly depending on which game state is controlled. Therefore, the player pays attention to the big hit type when the big hit occurs.

(Example of production in each production mode)
11-3, 11-4, and 11-5 show examples of effects in each effect mode when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). .. 11-3 (A1) to 11-3 (A3) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the cloudy mode. 11-4 (B1) to (B3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the rain mode. 11-5 (C1) to (C3) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect image when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" when the effect mode is the typhoon mode. Is.

(Small hit in cloudy mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, when the player selects the cloudy mode as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode. Controlled in cloudy mode. When the effect mode is the cloudy mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, a "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 corresponding to the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed in the unit and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 simultaneously executes the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. The variable display of is being executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 18TM021 displays four second hold display 18TM020.

In the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , The small hit continuous middle prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls given during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R probability variation big hit is generated and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hits have been generated three times so far, and as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A1), the small hits are continuous. A case where characters such as "third time" are displayed as a number display is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. As a result, 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls were obtained by three small hits, and a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained. Therefore, FIG. 11-3 (A1). As shown in the above, a case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 enters the symbol display area 5L in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being the “small hit” symbol. The number symbol ("1" in this example) is stopped, and any number symbol ("8" in this example) is stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the special symbol 18TM050 (ellipse) is stopped in the symbol display area 5C. It is a decorative symbol in which the characters "OPEN" are shown on the shaped object, and the decorative symbol that notifies the occurrence of a small hit) is stopped. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5R correspond to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being "small hit". In addition, the numerical symbols are fixedly stopped, and the special symbol 18TM050 is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5C. As a result, the player can expect a small hit (special symbol 18TM050 will stop in the symbol display area 5C) even after the combination of numerical symbols that does not reach the symbol display area 5L and 5R is stopped. it can.

Further, in the cloudy mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets the small symbol corresponding to the special symbol 18TM050, which is fixedly stopped when a small hit occurs, to "0", and sets the small symbol to the second small symbol display area 5l2. The second small symbol "1" corresponding to the decorative symbol (number symbol) "1", the second small symbol "0" corresponding to the special symbol 18TM050 in the second small symbol display area 5c2, the second small symbol In the display area 5r2, the second small symbol "8" corresponding to the decorative symbol (number symbol) "8" is fixedly stopped. Further, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters "small hit !!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, since the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 is the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed in the image display device 5 and the four second hold display 18TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the "small hit attacker are open!" Display the dialogue.

In addition, while the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, three game balls were won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls was further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to a total of 1620. It shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three “+10” images at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the number of small hit continuous prize balls as “ It is updated to "1620pt".

(Small hit in rain mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), when the player selects the rain mode as the effect mode when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode. Controlled to rain mode. When the effect mode is the rain mode and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the "rain image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 corresponding to the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed in the unit and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 simultaneously executes the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. The variable display of is being executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 18TM021 displays four second hold display 18TM020.

In the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , The small hit continuous middle prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls given during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R probability variation big hit is generated and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hits have been generated three times so far, and as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1), the small hits are continuous. A case where characters such as "third time" are displayed as a number display is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. As a result of the fact that 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls were obtained by the occurrence of three small hits, a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained, and this is shown in FIG. 11-4 (B1). As shown in the above, a case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 has a number in the symbol display area 5L corresponding to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being the “small hit” symbol. The symbol "1", the number symbol "3" in the symbol display area 5C, and the number symbol "5" in the symbol display area 5R are fixedly stopped. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the rain mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C correspond to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being "small hit". In 5R, a predetermined combination of numerical symbols (in this example, the order "135" of odd symbols) is fixedly stopped. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of a small hit even when the combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) different from the big hit symbol is stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that in the rain mode, the combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) that are fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when a small hit occurs is set to "135". The second small symbol display area 5l2 has a second small symbol "1" corresponding to the decorative symbol (number symbol) "1", and the second small symbol display area 5c2 has a decorative symbol (number symbol) "3". In the second small symbol "3" corresponding to the above and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second small symbol "5" corresponding to the decorative symbol (number symbol) "5" is fixedly stopped. Further, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters "small hit !!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, since the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period in which the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the image display device 5 and the four second hold display 18TM020 displayed on the second hold display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character on the image display device 5 and "Small hit attacker is open!" Display the dialogue.

In addition, while the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, three game balls were won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls was further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to a total of 1620. It shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three “+10” images at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen, and displays the number of small hit continuous prize balls at “1620 pt”. To update.

(Small hit in typhoon mode)
As shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, when the player selects the typhoon mode as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode. Controlled by typhoon mode. When the effect mode is the typhoon mode and the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern and the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 corresponding to the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) will be displayed in the unit and the lower left part of the screen.

The special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the background image with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). When the CUP 103 simultaneously executes the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. (Information corresponding to) is executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed. The variable display of is being executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 18TM021 displays four second hold display 18TM020.

In the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , The small hit continuous middle prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls given during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the 10R probability variation big hit is generated and the state is shifted to the second KT state, the small hit has been generated three times so far, and as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C1), the small hit is continuous. A case where characters such as "third time" are displayed as a number display is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls are obtained during the big hit game based on the first 10R probability variation big hit, and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each subsequent small hit. As a result, 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls were obtained by three small hits, and a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained. Therefore, FIG. 11-5 (C1). As shown in the above, a case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), the effect control CPU 120 enters the symbol display area 5L in response to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being the “small hit” symbol. The number symbol ("2" in this example), any number symbol in the symbol display area 5C ("4" in this example), any number symbol in the symbol display area 5R ("7" in this example) To stop each. Further, the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type image) is applied to each of the numerical symbols ("2", "4", "7" in this example) stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Overlay display. The effect image 18TM060 is displayed with a higher priority than the decorative symbol (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the decorative symbol and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode, the symbol display areas 5L and 5C correspond to the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol being "small hit". The combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped on 5R, and the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed on each of the stopped decorative symbols (number symbols). As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of a small hit even when the combination of decorative symbols (number symbols) different from the big hit symbol is stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second small symbol display area 5l2 with the decorative symbol (numerical symbol) "2" based on the combination of the decorative symbols (numerical symbols) that are fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2nd small symbol "2" corresponding to "", 2nd small symbol display area 5c2, 2nd small symbol "4" corresponding to "4" of decorative symbol (number symbol), 2nd small symbol display area In 5r2, the second small symbol "7" corresponding to the decorative symbol (number symbol) "7" is fixedly stopped. Further, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters "small hit !!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. Then, since the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display to "fourth time".

Next, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the effect control CPU 120 is the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed on the image display device 5 and the four second hold display 18TM020 displayed on the second hold display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the "small hit attacker are open!" Display the dialogue.

In addition, while the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, three game balls were won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls was further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to a total of 1620. It shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C3), the effect control CPU 120 displays three "+10" images at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen, and displays the number of small hit continuous prize balls by "1620 pt". To update.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the player can produce one of the cloudy mode, the rain mode, and the typhoon mode. The mode can be selected. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the symbol display area The occurrence of a small hit is notified by fixing and stopping the numerical symbol in the symbol display area 5R of 5L and by fixing and stopping the special symbol 18TM050 in the symbol display area 5C. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the effect mode is the rain mode, when the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", The occurrence of small hits is notified by definitely stopping the combination of decorative symbols (“135” in this example), which is the order of odd-numbered symbols, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3), when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the symbol display area when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit". The occurrence of a small hit is notified by definitely stopping the combination of decorative symbols on which the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type image) is superimposed and displayed on 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In this way, the effect of notifying the occurrence of a small hit (the effect when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped) differs depending on the effect mode, and the player selects the effect mode to obtain a small hit by any effect. It is also possible to select whether to notify the occurrence. As a result, the effect when a small hit occurs in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) can be made a desired effect by the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A2), when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the number symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) and the special symbol 18TM050 (on the elliptical object, “ A variable display of a decorative symbol including a small hit symbol (small hit symbol) in which the characters "OPEN" are shown is performed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B2), when the effect mode is the rain mode, the decorative symbols including only the numerical symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) are displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C2), when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the decorative symbols including only the numerical symbols (“0” to “9” in this example) are displayed in a variable manner. At the same time, when the display result is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed and displayed when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. In this way, it is possible to change the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the effect mode, and the game state is controlled to the high accuracy state (high accuracy / first KT state, high accuracy / second KT state). It is possible to improve the interest of the game while playing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is controlled to which effect mode. The small hit continuous number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen in a common display mode regardless of whether or not it is set, and the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is displayed regardless of which production mode is controlled. Is displayed at the bottom right of the screen in a common display mode. According to such a configuration, the display mode and the display area of the small hit continuous number display can be shared in each effect mode, so that the player can continuously perform small hits in the second KT state even if the game mode is switched. The number of times can be grasped accurately. Further, in each effect mode, the display mode and display area of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display can be shared, so that the player can continuously generate small hits in the second KT state even if the effect mode is switched. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of prize balls given during the period.

(Selection period of production mode)
In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state (high probability / first KT state (probability variation state), high probability / second KT state (small hit RUSH state)), and the second special symbol It is executed in response to the period during which the variation display (variation display of the second small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and (2) the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variation jackpot. During the jackpot ending period, the player can select the effect mode, and during the period that does not correspond to any of (1) and (2), the player cannot select the effect mode. That is, only in the period of any of (1) and (2), the player can select one of the effect modes of cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is in the low accuracy state (low accuracy / low base state (normal state), low accuracy / high base state (low accuracy / first KT state)). When the variable display of) is executed, the effect mode cannot be selected.

As the probability variation jackpot in the present embodiment, (i) the high accuracy / first KT state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state [6R probability variation jackpot], and (ii) the high accuracy / second KT state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There are [10R probability variation jackpot] and [2R probability variation jackpot] controlled to high accuracy / second KT state after the end of (iii) jackpot game state, and there are jackpot game states of (i) to (iii) jackpot types. During the jackpot ending period, which is executed in response to the end, the player can select the effect mode. On the other hand, the jackpot ending period executed in response to the end of the jackpot game state of the normal jackpot (6R normal jackpot, 2R normal jackpot) controlled to the low accuracy / high base state after the jackpot game state ends is the effect mode. You cannot make a selection.

(Selection of production mode during the jackpot ending period)
Next, an effect example in which the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of the probability variation jackpot will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7. FIG. 11-6 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of the probability variation jackpot, and FIGS. 11-7 (A1) to (A4) show high accuracy after the jackpot ends. / It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production image at the time of selecting the production mode in the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variation jackpot] controlled in the 1st KT state, and FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B4) are jackpots. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image at the time of selecting the effect mode in the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] which is controlled to a high accuracy / 2nd KT state after the end.

(Selection of production mode when controlled to high accuracy / 1st KT state)
11-6 and 11-7 (A1) show examples of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variation jackpot], which is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends. This will be described with reference to (A4).

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A1), when the jackpot type is [6R probability variation jackpot] and the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, it corresponds to the start of the jackpot ending period. Then, the effect mode selection period in which the effect mode can be selected is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, whereby the effect mode selection period is started.

On the effect mode selection screen, the effect mode image display area 18TM250 and the push button 31B, in which images corresponding to each selectable effect mode (cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C) are displayed, are operated. The operation promotion display 18TM210 that notifies the player that the effect mode can be selected and prompts the player to select the effect mode by operating the push button 31B, and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (effect mode). The time bar 18TM220, which notifies the remaining period of the selection period), is included.

The effect mode image display area 18TM250 is in the center of the screen, the operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed at the lower left of the screen, and the time bar 18TM220 is displayed at the lower right of the screen. The operation promotion display 18TM210 is an image imitating the shape of the push button 210. The characters "PUSH" are displayed on the left side of the operation promotion display 18TM210, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side of the operation promotion display 18TM210. By being displayed, the player is urged to select the effect mode by operating the push button 210. Further, the time bar 18TM220 displays 100% of the remaining time at the beginning of display, that is, at the timing when the effect mode selection period is started, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases with the passage of time. , The remaining time is displayed as 0% at the timing when the effect mode selection period ends.

In the effect mode image display area 18TM250, an effect mode image corresponding to the currently selected effect mode is displayed. In this example, since the cloudy mode image 18TM200A is displayed as the effect mode image, it means that the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 at the center of the screen on the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. At the same time, the effect mode image displayed on the left edge of the screen is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen. The effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 is switched in the order of cloudy mode image 18TM200A, rain mode image 18TM200B, typhoon mode image 18TM200C, and so on, each time the push button 31B is operated.

Further, the time bar 18TM220 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the effect mode in the jackpot ending period is determined by the ratio of the white portion to the entire width of the time bar 18TM220 (0 to 100%). Is set to notify the effect mode selection period, which is the period during which can be selected. The effect mode selection period indicated by the time bar 18TM220 is subtracted and updated every time the time elapses after the initial value (100%) is indicated, and finally reaches the final value (0%). Then, when the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%), the effect mode is controlled to the effect mode corresponding to the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250. By the time the display of the time bar 18TM220 reaches the final value (0%), the player operates the push button 31B to display the effect mode image displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 corresponding to the desired effect mode. Switch to production mode image.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 was displayed on the left edge of the screen in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-6). The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right edge of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. In addition, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire effect mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6). The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right edge of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. In addition, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has passed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 0%, and the effect is produced at the timing when the effect mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6). Based on the fact that the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to the typhoon mode. As the effect mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode by enlarging the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in the center of the screen.

(Selection of production mode when controlled to high accuracy / 2nd KT state)
FIG. 11-6 relates to an effect example in which the effect mode is selected during the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot. And FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B4) will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B1), when the jackpot type is [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot] and the gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot ending Corresponding to the start of the period, the effect mode selection period in which the effect mode can be selected is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect mode selection screen, whereby the effect mode selection period is started.

Here, unlike the case where the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) is controlled after the end of the big hit, the effect is based on the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit. The control CPU 120 blinks and displays the characters "RUSH" at the upper part of the screen (above the effect mode image display area 18TM250). By blinking the characters "RUSH", it is possible to notify the player that the player is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the left edge of the screen in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-6). The mode image 18TM200B is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the cloudy mode image 18TM200A displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right edge of the screen. At this time, since the rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the rain mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, too, the characters "RUSH" are blinked at the top of the screen, indicating that the rain mode corresponding to the rain mode image 18TM200B is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can grasp. In addition, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 75%, which means that 25% of the entire effect mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed at the left end of the screen in response to the operation of the push button 31B (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-6). The typhoon mode image 18TM200C is moved to the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen, and the rain mode image 18TM200B displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 in the center of the screen is moved to the right side of the screen. At this time, since the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250, the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode. Here, too, the characters "RUSH" are blinked at the top of the screen, indicating that the typhoon mode corresponding to the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is the production mode corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). The player can grasp. In addition, the display of the time bar 18TM220 has been updated to the remaining 25%, which means that 75% of the entire effect mode selection period has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), the display of the time bar 18TM220 is updated to the remaining 0%, and the effect is produced at the timing when the effect mode selection period ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-6). Based on the fact that the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is displayed in the mode image display area 18TM250, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode to the typhoon mode. As the effect mode is determined to be the typhoon mode, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect mode is controlled to the typhoon mode by enlarging the typhoon mode image 18TM200C in the center of the screen.

At this time, based on the control to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in the upper right part and the lower left part of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C, respectively. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed. Further, in the central portion of the enlarged typhoon mode image 18TM200C, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp showing the characters "RUSH" is superimposed and displayed. The special display 18TM100 has a higher priority than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). Further, the image 18TM230 has a higher priority than the background image and the special display 18TM100 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C (the display layer is higher than the background image and the special display 18TM100 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C). It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen from the player's side. That is, the display priority in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C is higher in the order of the background image <special display 18TM100 <image 18TM230 in the typhoon mode image 18TM200C.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3), the characters "RUSH" are blinked and displayed during the effect mode selection period (big hit ending period) after the big hit ends ( Although an effect is executed to notify that the player is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit ending period, the effect mode selection period (big hit ending) is not limited to this form. In the period), the effect of notifying that the player is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not executed, and whether or not the control is performed to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is performed. It may be difficult for the player to recognize.

For example, in the effect mode selection period (big hit ending period), by executing the suggestion effect, it is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit (after the end of the big hit ending period). May be suggested. Then, when the executed suggestion effect (RUSH suggestion effect) ends in a successful manner, it is controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit (after the end of the big hit ending period). On the other hand, when the executed suggestion effect (RUSH suggestion effect) ends in a failed mode, it is assumed that the high probability / first KT state (probability change state) is controlled after the end of the big hit (after the end of the big hit ending period). ..

For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a blackout effect (a darkened image as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5) after displaying the characters "RUSH" in the RUSH suggestion effect of the successful mode. By doing so, the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern is lowered to make it difficult to see). Next, the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is superimposed and displayed on the blackout image. Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is terminated (the background image is hidden as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5). (And improve the visibility of the decorative pattern to make it easier to see), and by displaying the image 18TM230 with the characters "RUSH" in the center of the screen, it is in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Notify that the transition will occur.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the blackout effect after displaying the characters "RUSH" in the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode, as in the case of the success mode. Next, as in the case of the successful mode, the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is superimposed and displayed on the blackout image. Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated, the blackout effect is terminated and an image showing the characters "failure" is displayed in the center of the screen to achieve high accuracy / second KT. Notifies that the state (small hit RUSH state) does not shift (in this case, shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state)).

As described above, in the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, when the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is controlled after the jackpot ends, the RUSH suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed and the jackpot ends. If it is not later controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), it is possible to execute the RUSH suggestion performance of the failure mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game when selecting the production mode.

Here, the RUSH suggestion effect of the success mode and the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode have the same production mode in the first half of the effect, and the player decides whether the RUSH suggestion effect is the success mode or fails in the first half of the effect. It is not possible to grasp whether it is a mode. Then, in the latter half of the RUSH suggestion effect, whether it is a success mode (high accuracy after the end of the big hit / controlled to the second KT state (small hit RUSH state)) or a failure mode (high accuracy after the end of the big hit / Whether it is controlled to the first KT state (probability change state)) is notified.

In this example, when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect (successful aspect) is executed, it is always controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit, and the second aspect (failure). When the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect) is executed, an example is shown in which the player is always controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) after the end of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is executed, an effect pattern controlled to a high probability / first KT state (probability change state) may be provided after the end of the big hit, and even when the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. An effect pattern controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit may be provided. However, when the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed, it is controlled to a higher accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the big hit than when the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed. When the RUSH suggestion effect of the second aspect is executed, the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is controlled to a high probability / first KT state (probability change state) after the jackpot is completed, as compared with the case where the RUSH suggestion effect of the first aspect is executed. It is assumed that the ratio is high.

As shown in FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7, during the effect mode selection period (the period of T1 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-6) of the jackpot ending period, the player operates the jackpot by operating the push button 31B. It is possible to select whether the effect mode controlled after the end of the game state is the cloudy mode, the rain mode, or the typhoon mode. According to such a configuration, the player can select a desired production mode when the jackpot game state is controlled, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B4), in the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period, the effect is based on being controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot. The control CPU 120 superimposes and displays a special display 18TM100 corresponding to being controlled in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) on the upper right portion and the lower left portion of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C of the image display device 5. At the center of the typhoon mode image 18TM200C, an image 18TM230 imitating a stamp showing the characters "RUSH" is superimposed and displayed.

In this way, the game state after the end of the big hit is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), and the game state after the end of the big hit is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In response to the fact that the effect can be executed by the common effect mode, the effect mode image to be displayed in the effect mode image display area 18TM250 is also shared during the effect mode selection period of the jackpot ending period. That is, regardless of which game state is controlled, the cloudy mode image 18TM200A corresponding to the cloudy mode is displayed when the cloudy mode is selected, and the rain mode is supported when the rain mode is selected. The rain mode image 18TM200B is displayed, and when the typhoon mode is selected, the typhoon mode image 18TM200C corresponding to the typhoon mode is displayed.

However, in the effect control CPU 120, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the gaming state after the end of the big hit is the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state). The additional information indicating that the game state after the end of the big hit is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed, unlike the case where it is controlled by. Specifically, as additional information, the characters "RUSH" (see FIGS. 11-7 (B1) to (B3)) are displayed above the selected effect mode image. In addition, as additional information, the special display 18TM100 is superimposed and displayed on the lower left and upper right parts of the determined effect mode image, and the image 18TM230 imitating a stamp showing the characters "RUSH" in the center (FIG. 11-). 7 (see B4)) is superimposed and displayed. As a result, the game state after the end of the big hit is the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) while sharing the effect mode image corresponding to the selected effect mode. It is possible for the player to know which game state is controlled.

(Selection of production mode during the period when variable display is being executed)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the period during which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy / first KT state, and the variation display of the second special symbol in the high accuracy / second KT state. It is possible to select the effect mode during the period when is being executed. An example of the effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11.

FIG. 11-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy / first KT state, and FIG. 11-9. Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy / first KT state. Further, FIG. 11-10 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy / second KT state. FIG. -11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the effect mode is selected during the period in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high accuracy / second KT state.

(High accuracy / 1st KT state production mode selection)
An example of the execution timing and effect image of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed when the game state is the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9.

As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode. , A "cloudy image" will be displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of a certain second special symbol (information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. ) Is being executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is displayed. Running.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 18TM021 displays four second hold display 18TM020.

Corresponding to the fact that the effect mode can be selected, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode indicating the currently selected effect mode ([cloudy mode] in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The icon 18TM300 is displayed, and the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300. The operation promotion display 18TM210 is an image imitating the push button 31B, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side of the operation promotion display 18TM210, so that the player can be directed by operating the push button 31B. It has been notified that the mode can be changed.

In the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the [(effect mode)] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is displayed. The actual production mode will be changed when the variation display of the second special symbol ends in response to the switching and the switching of [(effect mode)] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. ..

Specifically, each time the push button 31B is operated, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 to [cloudy mode] → [rain mode] → [typhoon mode]. Switch in order. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that has been executed is completed, the [effect mode] indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is the currently controlled effect mode (that is, execution). It is confirmed whether or not it is different from the effect mode) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Then, at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, if the [effect mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is different from the currently controlled effect mode, the effect mode change effect is executed. Then, the effect mode is changed from the current effect mode to the effect mode shown by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. On the other hand, when the [effect mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is the same as the currently controlled effect mode (that is, the push button 31B is not operated, or the push button 31B is operated. When the same effect mode as the current effect mode is selected), the effect mode is not changed without executing the effect mode change effect.

For example, when the actual effect mode is the cloudy mode at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the effect mode shown by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is set to [rain mode] or [typhoon mode]. If there is, the effect mode change effect is executed, and if the effect mode indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is [cloudy mode], the effect mode change effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Rain Mode]. Then, even after the effect mode shown by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [rain mode], the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. Is continuously displayed to notify the player that the effect mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-8), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Typhoon mode]. Then, even after the production mode shown by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to [typhoon mode], the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. Is continuously displayed to notify the player that the effect mode can be selected (changed) by further operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A4), at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol ends (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-9), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "8" in the symbol display area 5R are fixedly stopped, and the second small symbol display of the image display device 5 is performed. The second small symbol "1" is fixedly stopped in the area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is fixed in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "8" is fixedly stopped in the second small symbol display area 5r2. ..

In this example, the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", but when the game state is the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), the variation display result. Is not notified that is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), so the combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the variable display result is "missing" is fixedly stopped and the variable display is displayed. The combination of the second small symbols suggesting that the result is "off" is fixedly stopped. Similarly, when the gaming state is low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), it is not notified that the variation display result is "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize). The combination of decorative symbols suggesting that the variable display result is "off" is fixedly stopped, and the combination of the second small symbols suggesting that the variable display result is "off" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, while the operation promotion display prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. 18TM210 and the word "select with" displayed on the right side of it are erased. As a result, the player is notified that the effect mode cannot be selected (changed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (the period from T3 to T4 shown in FIG. 11-8), and the full screen of the image display device 5 is displayed as “ The mode change image 18TM310 showing the characters "mode CHANGE" is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). .. Further, the mode change image 18TM310 includes an active display 18TM030 in the active display area 18TM031, a first hold display 18TM010 in the first hold display area 18TM011, and a second hold display 18TM020 in the second hold display area 18TM021, that is, changes in the special symbol. It is displayed with a higher priority than the object corresponding to the display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, the decorative symbol, and the hold display and the active display, but is displayed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The first small symbol, the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, and the first reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is viewed from the player's point of view. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground). Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the first hold display 18TM010 of the first hold display area 18TM011 and the second hold display 18TM020 of the second hold display area 18TM021 become difficult to see, while the first hold display area 18TM020 is displayed. The first reserved storage number displayed in the reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are in a continuously visible state.

At this time (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-8), in response to the change of the effect mode from the variation display of the second special symbol to be executed next time to the typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative symbol is "typhoon". "Image" will be displayed. However, during the period when the effect mode change effect is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the changed background image "typhoon image". It is in a state of being.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as described above, the variation display result is the variation display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) in response to the fact that the variation display result was "small hit". In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decorative symbols ("148" in this example) suggesting that the variable display result is "off" is used. The fixed stop is continuously performed, and the combination of the second small symbols (“148” in this example) suggesting that the variable display result is “off” is continuously fixed and stopped. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image <[decorative symbol, first hold display 18TM010, second hold display 18TM020, active display 18TM030] <mode change image 18TM310 <[first small symbol, second small The number of symbols, the first reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, and the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025] are increasing in this order.

The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). .. Therefore, during the period when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decorative pattern. In addition, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image" (timing when the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image"). .. On the other hand, the second small symbol is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the effect mode change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A6), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect mode change effect (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-8). Corresponding to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 showing the characters "mode CHANGE" ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so that the mode change image 18TM310 having a higher display priority is displayed. Along with the decorative design, the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative design becomes visible.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as described above, the variation display result is the variation display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) in response to the fact that the variation display result was "small hit". In order not to notify that it is a "small hit" (it is difficult for the player to recognize), a combination of decorative symbols ("148" in this example) suggesting that the variable display result is "off" is used. The fixed stop is continuously performed, and the combination of the second small symbols (“148” in this example) suggesting that the variable display result is “off” is continuously fixed and stopped. In FIG. 11-9 (A6), the decorative design, which was once difficult to see due to the end of the display of the mode change image 18TM310 having a higher display priority, and the first hold display 18TM010, 2nd. The hold display 18TM020 and the active display 18TM030 have returned to a clearly visible state again.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is Since it is 4, "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variation display is continuously displayed in the active display area 18TM031, and the second hold display area 18TM021 is displayed in the second hold display area 18TM021. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (A7), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is started, and the second small symbol (second small symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 is started. The variable display of (information corresponding to the special symbol) is started (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the characters "select with" on the right side thereof. Notifies that the effect mode can be selected again.

(High accuracy / 2nd KT state production mode selection)
When the game state is high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the execution timing and effect image of each effect when the effect mode is selected during the period when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. An example will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11.

As shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, it is for effect control. The CPU 120 will display a "cloudy image" as a background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 performs the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of a certain second special symbol (information corresponding to a certain second special symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5. ) Is being executed, and in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is displayed. Running.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 18TM031 displays the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the second hold display area 18TM021 displays four second hold display 18TM020.

Corresponding to the fact that the effect mode can be selected, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect mode indicating the currently selected effect mode ([cloudy mode] in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The icon 18TM300 is displayed, and the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed below the icon 18TM300, and the character "select with" is displayed on the right side thereof.

Here, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 is placed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 in the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). ) Is displayed, and the special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the control is displayed. The special display 18TM100 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

The effect control CPU 120 has a special display 18TM100 in which the characters "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are shown at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Is displayed, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 is displayed, and the operation promotion display 18TM210 is displayed below it, and the characters "select with" are displayed on the right side thereof. At this time, the effect mode selection icon 18TM300, the operation promotion display 18TM210, and the characters "select with" have a higher priority than the special display 18TM100 (the display layer is higher than the special image 18TM100 and is in front of the player. It is displayed in a superposed manner so that it can be seen). That is, the display priority of each effect image is higher in the order of background image <special display 18TM100 <[effect mode selection icon 18TM300, operation promotion display 18TM210, character "select with"].

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. , The small hit continuous middle prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits are continuously generated in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that after the [10R probability variation big hit] has occurred and the state has been shifted to the second KT state, three small hits have been generated so far, and as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B1), the small hit has occurred. A case where a character such as "third time" is displayed as a continuous number of hits is shown. In addition, 15 x 10 balls x 10 rounds = 1500 prize balls were obtained during the big hit game based on the first [10R probability variation big hit], and 10 x 3 balls = 30 prize balls for each subsequent small hit. 11-10 (Fig. 11-10), based on the fact that a total of 1590 prize balls were obtained because 30 x 3 = 90 prize balls were obtained by the occurrence of three small hits. As shown in B1), a case where a character such as "1590pt" is displayed as a small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B2), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Rain Mode]. Then, even after the production mode shown by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "rain mode", the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. Is displayed continuously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B3), when the push button 31B is operated (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-10), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen. Switch the indicated production mode to [Typhoon mode]. Then, even after the production mode shown by the production mode selection icon 18TM300 is switched to the "typhoon mode", the operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B and the character "select with" on the right side thereof. Is displayed continuously.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol "1" in the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, and a special symbol 18TM050 (oval object) in the symbol display area 5C. (Small hit symbol with the characters "OPEN" shown in), the decorative symbol "8" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, and the second small symbol "8" in the image display device 5 is displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2. 1 ”, the second small symbol“ 0 ”in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol“ 8 ”in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped (in T3 shown in FIG. 11-10). timing).

That is, in response to the variation display result of the second special symbol being "small hit", the combination of decorative symbols for notifying that the display result is "small hit" as the combination of decorative symbols is fixedly stopped. , The combination of the second small symbols corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols is fixedly stopped. In addition, in response to being controlled to the small hit game state, the occurrence of a small hit is notified by displaying the characters "small hit !!" at the upper part of the screen. Then, since the game state is controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display to "fourth time".

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, while prompting the user to operate the push button 31B. The promotion display 18TM210 and the word "select with" displayed on the right side of the display 18TM210 are deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hit gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, the effect control CPU 120 is in the active display area 18TM031. The active display 18TM030 displayed in the image display device 5 and the four second hold display 18TM020 displayed in the second hold display area 18TM021 are erased, and the character and the "small hit attacker are open!" Display the dialogue.

In addition, while the special variable winning ball device 17 was open, three game balls were won in the special winning opening, and the number of prize balls was further increased by 10 × 3 balls = 30 to a total of 1620. It shall be. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B5), the effect control CPU 120 displays three images of "+10" at the bottom of the screen, and updates the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display to "1620 pt". ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change effect (the period from T4 to T5 shown in FIG. 11-10), and displays "on the full screen of the image display device 5". The mode change image 18TM310 showing the characters "mode CHANGE" is displayed. The mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player). .. Further, the mode change image 18TM310 includes an active display 18TM030 in the active display area 18TM031, a first hold display 18TM010 in the first hold display area 18TM011, and a second hold display 18TM020 in the second hold display area 18TM021, that is, changes in the special symbol. It is displayed with a higher priority than the object corresponding to the display.

Here, the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed with a higher priority than the background image, the decorative symbol, and the hold display and the active display, but is displayed in the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1. The first small symbol, the second small symbol displayed in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2, the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, and the first reserved storage number. The second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 has a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is viewed from the player's point of view. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground). Therefore, during the period in which the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the first hold display 18TM010 of the first hold display area 18TM011 and the second hold display 18TM020 of the second hold display area 18TM021 become difficult to see, while the first hold display area 18TM020 is displayed. The first reserved storage number displayed in the reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 are in a continuously visible state.

At this time (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-10), in response to the change of the effect mode from the variation display of the second special symbol to be executed next time to the typhoon mode, the background image of the decorative symbol is "typhoon". "Image" will be displayed. However, during the period when the effect mode change effect is executed, the mode change image 18TM310, which has a higher display priority than the background image, is displayed on the entire screen, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the changed background image "typhoon image". It is in a state of being.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, corresponding to the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol executed last time (immediately executed) was "small hit". As a combination of decorative symbols, the decorative symbol "2" is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" is displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the symbol display area 5R, and the symbol display area 5L is displayed. The effect image 18TM060 (in this example, a musical note type image) is superimposed and displayed on each of the numerical symbols displayed on the 5C, 5R. Further, as a combination of the second small symbols, the second small symbol display area 5l2 has the second small symbol "2", the second small symbol display area 5c2 has the second small symbol "4", and the second small symbol display area. The second small symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on 5r2. Here, the display priority of each effect image is as follows: background image <[decorative symbol, first hold display 18TM010, second hold display 18TM020, active display 18TM030] <effect image 18TM060 <mode change image 18TM310 <[first small symbol. , The second small symbol, the first reserved storage number of the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015, and the second reserved storage number of the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025].

The mode change image 18TM310 has a higher priority than the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060)), and is in front of the player. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen. Therefore, during the period when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the background image and the decorative pattern (including the effect image 18TM060). In addition, the player cannot recognize that the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image" (timing when the background image has been changed from "cloudy image" to "typhoon image"). .. On the other hand, the second small symbol is displayed with a higher priority than the mode change image 18TM310 (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the mode change image 18TM310 and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player). Therefore, it is clearly visible even during the execution period of the effect mode change.

Here, when the mode change image 18TM310 is displayed, the second small symbol (design corresponding to the small hit) being displayed changes from the small hit symbol "108" corresponding to the cloudy mode to the small hit corresponding to the typhoon mode. It will be changed to a symbol (a combination of number symbols different from the jackpot symbol).

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B7), the effect control CPU 120 ends the effect mode change effect (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-10). Corresponding to the end of the effect mode change effect, the display of the mode change image 18TM310 showing the characters "mode CHANGE" ends. When the typhoon mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, so that the mode change image 18TM310 having a higher display priority is displayed. Along with the decorative design, the "typhoon image" as the background image of the decorative design becomes visible.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a decoration when the effect mode is the typhoon mode based on the fact that the variation display result of the second special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "small hit". As a combination of symbols, the decorative symbol "2" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol "4" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5C, and the decorative symbol "7" is continuously displayed in the symbol display area 5R. The effect image 18TM060 (note-shaped image in this example) is continuously superimposed and displayed on each of the number symbols of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second small symbol is used as a combination of the second small symbols. The second small symbol "2" is continued in the display area 5l2, the second small symbol "4" is continued in the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol "7" is continued in the second small symbol display area 5r2. It is displayed. In FIG. 11-11 (B7), the decorative design (including the effect image 18TM060), which was once difficult to see due to the end of the display of the mode change image 18TM310 having a higher display priority, and the first The 1 hold display 18TM010, the 2 hold display 18TM020, and the active display 18TM030 have returned to a clearly visible state again.

Since the first reserved storage number is 2, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays “2” in the first reserved storage number special display area 18TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is Since it is 4, "4" is continuously displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 18TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display 18TM030 corresponding to the previously executed (most recently executed) variation display is continuously displayed in the active display area 18TM031, and the second hold display area 18TM021 is displayed in the second hold display area 18TM021. Four 18TM020 are displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 indicating [typhoon mode] at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B8), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the second special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is started, and the second small symbol (second small symbol) in the second small symbol display area 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 is started. The variable display of (information corresponding to the special symbol) has started (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion display 18TM210 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the characters “select with” on the right side thereof.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the effect mode is selected according to the movement of the player during the variable display of the second special symbol. (Change of production mode) is possible. When the game state is a low probability state (low probability / low base state, low probability / first KT state), the icon for selecting the effect mode is not displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the player is in the effect mode. Cannot be selected (change of production mode). Further, even when the gaming state is a high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the period during which the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed (variation display of the second special symbol). Is not executed and only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the period when the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) The effect mode selection icon is not displayed, and the player cannot select the effect mode (change the effect mode).

As shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, in the present embodiment, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the small hit is generated depending on the mode in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. The effect of notifying is different depending on which effect mode is controlled. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B3), the effect mode is set according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the period during which the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. You can switch. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the effect mode change effect is executed, and the mode change in which the characters "mode CHANGE" are shown on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Image 18TM310 is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment in which the combination of decorative symbols to be fixedly stopped when a small hit occurs differs depending on the effect mode, the mode change image 18TM310 is not displayed when the effect mode is changed. It is assumed that a configuration (that is, a configuration that does not reduce the visibility of the background image or the decorative pattern) is adopted. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the effect mode is controlled to the cloudy mode, the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit", and the image The special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol in which the characters "OPEN" are shown on the elliptical object) is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5C of the display device 5, and after the small hit game is completed, the background image, the decorative symbol, etc. As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7), the effect mode is set while the visibility is not deteriorated (the background image, the decorative pattern, etc. can be continuously and clearly visually recognized). It will be changed to typhoon mode. As a result, along with the change of the background image, the decorative symbol in the stopped state is also changed (the combination of the numerical symbols on which the effect image 18TM060 is superimposed is displayed), so that the screen is sudden (decorative symbol, background image). The switching of is confusing the player.

Here, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (B6), when the effect mode is changed, the mode change image 18TM310 is superimposed and displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5, so that the symbol display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. By reducing the visibility of the entire screen including 5L, 5C, and 5R, the visibility of the decorative symbol in the effect mode before the change is once lowered, and then the visibility of the decorative pattern in the effect mode after the change is improved. Therefore, even in this embodiment in which the decorative design differs between the production mode before the change and the production mode after the change, the player may be confused by switching the screen (decorative design, background image). Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control A "cloudy image" is displayed as a background image of the decorative pattern by the CPU 120, and as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), the gaming state is highly accurate / the second KT state (small hit RUSH state). ), And when the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode, the effect control CPU 120 displays a “cloudy image” as a background image of the decorative pattern. The "cloudy image" as the background image is a common background image in the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) and the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (A1) to (A4), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state), the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is not superimposed and displayed on the part, but FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to ( As shown in B5), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the high accuracy / second KT state (high accuracy / second KT state) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the small hit RUSH state) is superimposed and displayed. According to such a configuration, the background image can be shared between the high accuracy / first KT state and the high accuracy / second KT state, and the high accuracy / first KT state and the high accuracy / second KT state can be specified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B1) to (B5), when the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) and the cloudy mode is selected as the effect mode. The special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. Then, even after the effect mode is changed, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B7) to (B8), the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), and the effect mode When the typhoon mode is selected as, the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) are displayed in the upper right part of the screen and the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. The special display 18TM100 shown is displayed. That is, since this special display 18TM100 is common regardless of the effect mode, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) in the present embodiment that can be controlled to a plurality of types of effect modes. You can make it clearer.

As shown in FIG. 11-9, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), the gaming state is the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit) as shown in FIG. 11-11. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated by the player during the period during which the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed when controlled to the RUSH state), the effect mode at the lower left of the screen is displayed. The display of [cloudy mode] shown on the selection icon 18TM300 is switched in the order of [rain mode] display → [typhoon mode] display. Then, at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol is completed, the [typhoon mode] shown on the effect mode selection icon 18TM300 at the lower left of the screen is different from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode). The effect mode is changed from the currently controlled effect mode (cloudy mode) to the effect mode (typhoon mode) indicated by the effect mode selection icon 18TM300. In this way, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), and when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), the second special Since it is possible to control one of a plurality of types of effect modes based on the movement of the player during the period during which the variable display of the symbol is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Big hit countdown production)
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel. Further, when the gaming state is the high accuracy / second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol. In such an embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit", the display result is "missing" or "small hit". When the variation display of the symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the jackpot countdown effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit". In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit" is being executed, the variable display result of the second special symbol to be started shall be "missing" or "small hit". ..

When the jackpot countdown effect is executed, a countdown display is displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 until the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit" is completed. The countdown display has a higher priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) (the display layer is higher than the background image and the decorative symbol and is in front of the player. It is displayed in a superposed manner so that it can be seen). That is, since the countdown display is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 by executing the jackpot countdown effect, the visibility of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is reduced, and the sub symbol is reduced. It can be noted that the variable display result of the first special symbol is a "big hit". Further, in the present embodiment, when the game state is the high accuracy / second KT state, it is possible to control to any of the effect modes selected from a plurality of types of effect modes, but the jackpot countdown effect is any effect. It can be executed in common even when the mode is controlled. According to such a configuration, in the present embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel at the same time, the effect of the jackpot notification corresponding to the special symbol as the sub symbol is produced. You can improve your interest.

In this embodiment, when the CPU 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit", the display result is "missing" or "small hit". Although the example in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the jackpot countdown effect at the timing of starting the fluctuation display of the above is shown, the jackpot countdown effect may be executed at another timing. For example, when the CPU 103 is executing (i) variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is "missing" or "small hit", (ii) the first special whose display result is "big hit". When the variation display of the symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 (ii) displays the display result as "missing" when the variation display of the first special symbol whose display result is "big hit" is being executed. Or, at the timing when the variation display of the second special symbol that becomes a "small hit" ends and (iii) the variation display of the next second special symbol that the display result becomes "missing" or "small hit" starts. A jackpot countdown effect may be executed.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, as an effect of switching the effect mode, the small hit RUSH can be played in the effect mode that suits each player's taste, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the effect mode can be switched not only during the period controlled to the jackpot game state but also during the variable display of the special symbol, so that the convenience of the player can be improved. Furthermore, in a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the production mode, the game becomes monotonous even during the period when the advantageous value is given, and the interest is reduced. Since the production mode can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small hit RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest of the period during which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(Other features and variations)
(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-29, the KT state (high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state), low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state), high accuracy / second KT state). (Small hit RUSH state)), since the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, mainly [10R probability variation jackpot], [2R probability variation jackpot], [6R probability variation jackpot] , And [2R normal jackpot] occurs, and when [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs, it shifts to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. An example is shown in which the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained until the game is completed, but not limited to such a form, when [2R probability variation big hit] occurs, the game shifts to another game state. You may.

For example, if [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs while being controlled to the KT state, the transition to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) occurs after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot occurs. The high accuracy / first KT state (probability change state) is maintained until the 50th variation display is completed. Then, when the next big hit does not occur and the 50th fluctuation display is completed, the transition from the 51st fluctuation display to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is performed until the next big hit occurs. It may be a gaming state in which the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) is maintained. In addition, when [2R probability change jackpot] occurs, the game state shifts to the high probability / first KT state (probability change state), but as a background image, the "night" showing the night scenery including the night sky and mountains. The background image may be the same as that of the "image", that is, the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state).

At this time, if [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs, it shifts to the high accuracy / first KT state (probability variation state) after the end of the jackpot game, and the next jackpot does not occur in the fluctuation display of 50 times. In the 50th variation display, the RUSH suggestion effect of the success mode described above may be executed, and the 51st variation display may shift to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). In addition, when [2R normal jackpot] occurs, it shifts to the low accuracy / first KT state (time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game, and when the next jackpot does not occur in the fluctuation display of 50 times. May execute the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode described above in the 50th variation display, and shift from the 51st variation display to the low probability / non-KT state (normal state).

In this way, when the KT state is controlled, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is the same between the case where [2R probability variation jackpot] occurs and the case where [2R normal jackpot] occurs (both are 2 rounds). Therefore, since a common "night image" is displayed as a background image in any game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot game, the player can grasp which game state is controlled. It has become difficult. Then, when the next big hit does not occur in the 50th fluctuation display, if the previous big hit is [2R probability variation big hit], the RUSH suggestion effect of the success mode is executed in the 50th fluctuation display. If the previous jackpot was [2R normal jackpot], the RUSH suggestion effect of the failure mode will be executed at the 50th variation display. According to such a configuration, when [2R probability variation jackpot] or [2R normal jackpot] occurs, it is necessary to grasp which gaming state is controlled until the 50th variation display is executed. This becomes difficult, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest when the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is two. Further, by executing the RUSH suggestion effect at the time of the 50th variation display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the KT state (low accuracy / first KT state, high accuracy / first KT state).

(2) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 to 11-5, when the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit game state) is controlled, the occurrence of a small hit is supported. As an effect to be performed, an example is shown in which the mode when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped differs depending on the effect mode. The winning sound effect, the winning effect effect, the addition effect, etc. when the game ball wins the special winning opening during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the winning game state is open may be different depending on the effect mode.

For example, the winning sound effect is produced by playing back and outputting a sound effect at the timing when the game ball wins in the special winning opening while the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game state is open. It is a production that notifies that the game ball has won a prize. At this time, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the sound effect A is reproduced and output as a sound effect, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the sound effect B is reproduced and output as the sound effect, and the effect mode is set. In the typhoon mode, the sound effect C may be reproduced and output as the sound effect.

Further, for example, the special variable winning ball device 17 includes a light guide plate device composed of a light guide plate and a front decorative plate provided in front of the light guide plate and having transparency, and by injecting light into the light guide plate. , The decorative portion of the front decorative plate may be configured to emit light. For example, in the winning effect effect, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening while the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game state is open, light is incident on the light guide plate to decorate the front decorative plate. By making the part emit light, it is shown as if the special variable winning ball device 17 is emitting light, and the special winning opening is notified that the game ball has won a prize. In such a winning effect effect, the mode of the special variable winning ball device 17 may be different depending on the effect mode by making the color of the light incident on the light guide plate different depending on the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate is white, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate is blue. When is in the typhoon mode, the color of the light incident on the light guide plate may be red.

In FIG. 11-3 (A3) described above, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 in the small hit game state is open, the image display device 5 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. An example of executing an addition effect for displaying an image of "+10" is shown. The mode of this addition effect may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the image of "+10" is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. 5 is displayed in a mode of moving from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen (a mode related to the "rain image" of the background image), and when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the image of "+10" is displayed on the image display device. It may be displayed in a mode of randomly moving the entire screen of 5 (a mode related to the "typhoon image" of the background image). Further, the mode (color, typeface, effect, etc.) of the "+10" image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 may be different depending on the effect mode.

(3) In the above embodiment, the decoration is determined by the type of the decorative symbol, the combination of the decorative symbols when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, and the presence or absence of the effect image when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, depending on the effect mode. Although an example of differently displaying the variable display of the symbol has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the variable display of the decorative symbol may be different depending on other effect elements.

For example, the speed of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol is slow, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol is higher than that of the cloudy mode. When it is fast and the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the speed of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be faster than that in the rain mode. The speed of the variable display of the decorative pattern increases in the order of cloudy mode <rain mode <typhoon mode.

Further, for example, the mode of the decorative design itself that is variablely displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, when the effect mode is the cloudy mode, the decorative pattern in the white mode (the symbol in which the white number is shown) is variablely displayed, and when the effect mode is the rain mode, the decorative pattern in the blue mode is displayed. (The symbol with the blue number) may be displayed in a variable manner, and when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, the decorative symbol in the red mode (the symbol with the red number) may be displayed in a variable manner. ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the effect mode, and the game state is a high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state). ), It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state), as shown in FIGS. 11-3, 11-4, and 11-5. An example is shown in which the small hit continuous middle prize ball number display is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 in a common display mode regardless of which production mode is controlled. Similarly, regardless of which effect mode is controlled, the small hit continuous number display may be displayed in a common area of the image display device 5 in a common display mode.

(5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6, (i) the jackpot ending period of [6R probability variation jackpot] controlled to the high accuracy / first KT state after the jackpot ends, and (ii) the jackpot end. An example was shown in which the jackpot ending period of [10R probability variation jackpot] or [2R probability variation jackpot], which is later controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state, is a common period, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and (i) The jackpot ending period shown in (ii) and the jackpot ending period shown in (ii) may be different periods. For example, assuming that the effect mode selection period is common (for example, t seconds), in the case of (i), after the effect mode selection period ends, it is controlled to a high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state). Since the effect of displaying the special display 18TM100 showing the characters "RUSH" corresponding to the above is not executed, the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period is shortened. In the case of (for example, 10 seconds), (ii), the "RUSH" corresponding to being controlled to the high accuracy / second KT state (small hit RUSH state) after the effect mode selection period ends. Since the effect of displaying the special display 18TM100 showing the characters is executed, the period from the end of the effect mode selection period to the end of the jackpot ending period may be longer than in the case of (i). (For example, 30 seconds). In this way, by making the jackpot ending period [(t + 10) seconds] shown in (i) different from the jackpot ending period [(t + 30) seconds] shown in (ii), it is appropriate to correspond to the controlled gaming state. The production period may be provided.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example in which the effect mode can be selected by the player's operation during the jackpot ending period is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the jackpot start period (fanfare effect period), the player The effect mode may be selectable by operation, or the effect mode may be selectable by the player's operation during the round period (round effect period).

(7) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display information such as the background image can be changed by the operation of the player is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form and is reproduced during the small hit RUSH by the operation of the player. The music to be played may be selectable. For example, during the big hit game state (fanfare production period, round production period, ending production period) when the small hit RUSH state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the subsequent small hit RUSH is performed according to the operation of the player. The music to be played inside may be selectable. Further, even during the small hit RUSH, the music to be played during the subsequent small hit RUSH may be changed according to the operation of the player. In a situation where the small hit RUSH continues for a relatively long time, if there is no change in the music, the game will be played in a place where the game becomes monotonous and the interest is reduced even during the period when the advantageous value is given. Since the music can be switched, the monotony of the game during the small hit RUSH can be eliminated, and the interest of the period during which the advantageous value is given can be further enhanced.

(8) In the above embodiment, when the player is selected in the high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, the player is selected. After executing the effect mode change effect within the period from the end of the variation period of the second special symbol to the start of the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol), the next variation display (second special symbol variation display). 2 The actual effect mode (background image) is changed before (or at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol) is started. Here, even in the high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player selects the effect mode during the period when the variation display of the second special symbol is not executed. Can't.

(8-1) Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-11, in the high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) and within the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, When the player's selection operation is performed, the actual effect mode (background image) is not changed according to the selection operation before the variable period of the second special symbol ends, and the effect mode name. The display of is changed to the display of the effect mode name to be changed. At this time, the player may be further notified that [the selected effect mode is controlled from the next variation display]. For example, on the screen of FIG. 11-9 (A3), the message "The typhoon mode will be changed from the next fluctuation" may be displayed on the screen, and the message of FIGS. 11-11 (B3) to (B5) may be displayed. On the screen, the message "The next fluctuation will change to typhoon mode." May be displayed on the screen. Then, the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) is started by executing the effect mode change effect within the period until the next variation display (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed. The actual effect mode (background image) may be changed before (or at the same time as the start).

(8-2) Further, unlike the above example, the player selection operation is performed within the high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state) and the fluctuation period of the second special symbol. In that case, before the end of the fluctuation period of the second special symbol, the display of the effect mode name is changed and the actual effect is performed according to the selection operation (for example, at the timing immediately after the selection operation is performed). The mode (background image) may also be changed. In such an effect configuration, the period during which the actual effect mode (background image) can be changed together with the display of the effect mode name according to the selection operation is, for example, from the start of change of the decorative symbol (start of change of the second special symbol). It may be a period until the first decorative symbol stops (for example, the left decorative symbol stops in the symbol display area 5L), and 2 seconds from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of fluctuation of the second special symbol). It may be a period until it elapses.

(9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, in the high accuracy / second KT state, the effect mode change operation is performed during the variable display of the second special symbol whose display result is the small hit symbol. When this is done, the background image in the small hit game state is a background image corresponding to the effect mode before the change. That is, the effect mode is not changed in the small hit game state (the effect mode before the small hit occurs is maintained), and the effect mode is changed after the small hit game state ends. Here, even when the second hold storage number when the small hit game state ends is 0 (even when the second hold memory number when the effect mode change effect ends is 0), the small hit game state The effect mode after the end of is changed to the selected effect mode. That is, when the second reserved storage number when the small hit game state ends is 0 (when the second reserved storage number when the effect mode change effect ends is 0), the small hit game The background image after the state ends (the background image after the effect mode change effect ends) is changed to the background image corresponding to the selected effect mode, but the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol changes. No display is performed.

(10) In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the look-ahead notice effect may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, regarding the execution rate of the hold change effect that changes the display mode of the hold display (corresponding display corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed) based on the judgment result at the time of starting winning, the cloudy mode is the highest and the rain mode is 2. It may be the highest and the typhoon mode may be the lowest. Further, in the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, as a setting suggestion effect, a small hit is based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 and the special variable winning ball device 17 are opened and a game ball is won in the large winning opening or the special winning opening. When the prize-winning suggestion effect and the prize ball number display suggestion effect are configured to be executable, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is the second highest, and the typhoon mode is the highest in terms of the execution ratio of these setting suggestion effects. It may be lowered.

Further, the execution ratio may be different for each effect mode depending on the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed. For example, regarding the execution rate of the suggestion effect at the time of winning a small hit, the cloudy mode is the highest, the rain mode is the second highest, and the typhoon mode is the lowest. May be the highest, the rain mode the second highest, and the cloudy mode the lowest.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a game state control means (CPU103) for controlling the game state and an effect control means (effect control CPU120) for controlling the effect, and has a disadvantageous set value (for example, 1). A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can set any setting value from a plurality of setting values including ~ 3) and an advantageous setting value (for example, 4 to 6) that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. In the pachinko gaming machine 1), the game state control means (CPU103) includes an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, a special state (small hit game state) that is different from the advantageous state, and the above. It is possible to control the special state (high accuracy / second KT state) in which the game value is easily given by the special state, and the effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) is the special state (high accuracy / second KT state). In, it is possible to control to one of a plurality of production modes (cloudy mode, rain mode, and typhoon mode) based on the player's operation (the push button 31B is operated by the player). Yes, it is possible to make the predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state different depending on the effect mode (as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A1) to (A3), the effect mode is the cloudy mode. In this case, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the special symbol 18TM050 (small hit symbol in which the characters "OPEN" are shown on the elliptical object) is displayed in the symbol display area 5C. When the confirmation is stopped and the effect mode is the rain mode as shown in FIGS. 11-4 (B1) to (B3), when the variation display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit". , The combination of decorative symbols (“135” in this example), which is the order of odd symbols, is fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and is shown in FIGS. 11-5 (C1) to (C3). As described above, when the effect mode is the typhoon mode, when the variation display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the effect image 18TM060 (in this example, the note) is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of decorative symbols superposed on the mold image) is fixedly stopped), and further, a determining means capable of determining control to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 14). A specific effect (for example, a cut of the pattern CI-3) is provided as a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled based on the part to be executed) and the determination result of the determination means. Implication effect execution means (for example, effect during effect display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 15-18) that can be executed in the mode including the in-effect and the mode not including the in-effect. When the suggestion effect executing means is set to the disadvantage setting value and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the above-mentioned specificity is provided. The suggestion effect of the aspect including the effect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 and If the variable display result is out of alignment, it is determined that the cut-in effect is set to the advantageous setting value (a portion that cannot be executed by the pattern CI-3) and is controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. When not, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and when the suggested effect is executed, A special pattern (PB1-5) in which the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect shown in FIG. 15-6 is notified that the advantageous state is controlled after it is once suggested that the advantageous state is not controlled. )), And when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect to be executed is the ratio of the suggestion effect of the aspect not including the specific effect. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), which is lower than the execution rate (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E)). Is a part in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect).

According to such a configuration, since the effect mode can be selected by the action of the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the special state. In addition, when it is suggested that the suggestion effect including the specific effect is executed and the advantageous state is not controlled, the advantageous state is set in the special pattern even though the player recognizes that the advantageous set value is set. By notifying that it is controlled, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in the recognition.

In addition to the suggestion effect of the mode including the specific effect, it corresponds to the control of the special state according to the type of the effect mode controlled to one of a plurality of types based on the movement of the player in the special state. The setting value may be suggested according to the mode of the predetermined effect to be executed. For example, a plurality of types of predetermined effects to be executed in response to the control of a special state (small hit game state) are prepared in each effect mode (for example, when a "small hit" is obtained in the cloudy mode, a symbol is displayed. Three types of special symbols A, B, and C are prepared as special symbols that are fixedly stopped in the display area 5C), and the mode of the predetermined effect is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like at each timing when the predetermined effect can be executed. By selecting and making the selection ratio of each mode of the predetermined effect different depending on the set value, the predetermined effect is executed in a specific type of mode so that the set value is advantageous to the player. It may be facilitated (for example, in the cloudy mode, the special symbol C is likely to be fixedly stopped when a "small hit" occurs). By doing so, it is expected that the types of predetermined effects will be further enriched, and that the set values set will be advantageous to the player when the predetermined effects according to the specific types are executed. Since the feeling is improved, the game entertainment can be improved.
In addition, the setting value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements, a suggestion effect of a mode including a specific effect and a type of a predetermined effect mode executed in response to the control of a special state). For example, when a plurality of factors suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, and a certain factor is advantageous to the player. Even if a favorable setting value is not suggested, if an advantageous setting value is suggested by other factors, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player. Can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game in a special state and reduce a decrease in the interest of a game due to an error in recognition, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player. A plurality of settings that can be controlled to the game state) and include a disadvantage setting value (for example, 1 to 3) and an advantage setting value (for example, 4 to 6) that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of setting any set value from among the values, and a determination means capable of determining control to the advantageous state (for example, the special CPU 103 shows in FIG. 14). A specific effect (for example, pattern CI-3) is provided as a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the symbol is controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, the variable display shown in FIG. 7 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-18) that can be executed in the mode including and the mode not including the cut-in effect of When the suggestion effect execution means is set to the disadvantageous set value and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state. The suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect cannot be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. , And if the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect is set to the advantageous setting value (a portion where the pattern CI-3 cannot be executed), and is controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. When is not determined, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be used. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display result is out of alignment, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3), and the suggested effect is executed. In addition, after it is once suggested that the advantageous state is not controlled, a special pattern is notified that the advantageous state is controlled (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect shown in FIG. 15-6 (PB1). −5)), and when the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio at which the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect is executed is executed. Is lower than the rate at which the suggestion effect of the aspect not including the specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (A) to 15-21 (E), the supermarket that executes the revival effect. When the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of the reach γ jackpot, the ratio of executing the cut-in effect with the pattern CI-3 is higher than when the variable display is executed with the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot without executing the revival effect. The part where is set low) can be mentioned as a game machine. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

(Basic explanation which is a premise of the feature part 208SG of this embodiment)
First, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14, among the basic configurations and controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is a premise of the feature unit 208SG described later, the points different from those of FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 described above will be described. To do. Except for these differences, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is the premise of the feature unit 208SG is basically the same as the configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. Is similar to.

FIG. 12 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. Instead of connecting the frame LED 9 to the effect control board 12 via the LED control board 14, lamp control is performed. The main difference from FIG. 2 is that the game effect lamp 909 is connected via the substrate 9014. Further, the game effect lamp 909 is provided at a position where the frame LED 9 is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area in FIG. 1, and the game effect lamp 909 is configured to include the LED.

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process similar to FIG. 3 described above receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S9027, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S901 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S90110 to S90120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Explanation of feature section 208SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-1 to 15-39.

First, FIG. 15-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 208SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 208SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 208SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 208SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 208SG003 with the left side as the center and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 208SG003a, and when the glass door frame 208SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 208SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 208SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 208SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 208SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 208SG002R is the left game area 208SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which the (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 208SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 208SG002L, and in the right game area 208SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 208SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 15-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 208SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 208SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 208SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 15-2 and 15-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 208SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 208SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 208SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 208SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 208SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is housed in the board case 208SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 208SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 208SG201.

Since the board case 208SG201 having the lock switch 208SG051 and the setting changeover switch 208SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 208SG003 in the closed state, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 208SG003. Further, since the lock switch 208SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 208SG051. Further, the lock switch 208SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the substrate case 208SG201, a display monitor 208SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 208SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 208SG201. That is, the display monitor 208SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 208SG201 when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 208SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG, if the lock switch 208SG051 and the release sensor 208SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 208SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 208SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 208SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 208SG029 is set as a new set value. To. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-1 and 15-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 208SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 208SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special figure, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Device 208SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 208SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 208SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal figure hold indicator 208SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 208SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 208SG002R. A game information display unit 208SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 208SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 208SG 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 208SG 134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 208SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 208SG004A and the second special symbol display device 208SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 208SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 208SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 208SG025A and the second hold indicator 208SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 208SG025A and second hold indicator 208SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 208SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 208SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 208SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 208SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 208SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 208SG321 and a second movable body 208SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 208SG331 that can detect that the 1 movable body 208SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 208SG321 and the second movable body 208SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 208SG322. The origin detection sensor 208SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 208SG332.

FIG. 15-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 15-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the feature unit 208SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 15-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 15-6 shows the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 15-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIGS. 15-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In the feature section 208SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 15-7 and 15-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

15-7 to 15-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 15-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1272 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1292 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the game state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1556 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-9 (B) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 15-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 is assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 15-9 (F) is a second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 15-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 15-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 15-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 15-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1556 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 15-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 15-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 208SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each display result determination table for the first special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-7 and 15-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value, which is different from the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10, in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range of the hit determination values from 1020-1237 is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value is the same as in the first special figure display result judgment table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is to judge the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 208SG004A or the second special symbol display device 208SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

15-11 (A) and 15-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 15-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 15-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot types, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) for shifting to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player five times (so-called 5 rounds) and is repeatedly executed. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-5), Super Reach δ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random value within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. Although the embodiment in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, 0 to 997 out of the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is the small hit variation pattern ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of holding storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is implemented are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation (PA2-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation (PA2-2), and the super The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of the reach β out of line (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ out of line (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 15-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for a low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super are corresponding to the total number of reserved storages of 2 to 4. Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), Super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 15-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 913 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach γ. It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 15-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random value within the range that the MR3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 15-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 is the variation of non-reach deviation. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 913 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4). Therefore, 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 15-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-14 (A) to 15-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed).

Further, the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 15-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 208SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (detection order of game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 208SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 208SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

In the effect control flag setting unit, there are a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the reserved storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning, the start opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. 15-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIGS. 15-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (208SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (208SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is the predetermined upper limit value (the number of reserved stored figures of the first special figure). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (208SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (208SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 208SGS501a (208SGS501a; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 208SGS502 (208SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by (208SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (208SGS501b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (. For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (208SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 208SGS505 (208SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (208SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (208SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (208SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS503 and 208SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (208SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (208SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 208SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (208SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (208SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 208SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 208SGS510, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (208SGS 511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the process of 208SGS511, the random number value determination process at the time of winning is executed (208SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (208SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 13 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 208SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (208SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS515), and then the process proceeds to 208SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (208SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (208SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed by 208SGS512 of FIG. 15-15 as a winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 208SG, in the special symbol normal process (step S22 of FIG. 14), the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed. Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 15-7 to 15-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of 208SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 208SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (208SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 208SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (208SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (208SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-7 (A) is used. When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the game state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is the probability change state. If there is, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-7 (D) is set, and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 15-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-7 (F) is set. To set.

Further, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 15-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 15-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 15-8 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 15-9 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 15-10 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 15-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (208SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 208SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (208SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 208SGS525 (208SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (208SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (208SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (208SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (208SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 15-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (208SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 15-14 (D), and proceeds to 208SGS536 (208SGS530).

When it is determined by the 208SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (208SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (208SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the jackpot is A, a third symbol designation command when the jackpot is B, and a fourth symbol when the jackpot is C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (208SGS534), and then the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (208SGS535). ), Proceed to 208SGS536.

Further, when the 208SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (208SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". Is executed (208SGS531), the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 15-13 (B) is selected and set (208SGS532), and the process proceeds to 208SGS536.

In the feature unit 208SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. 701 to 997 are assigned the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach is the determination. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS529, 208SGS530, 208SGS532,208SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform disturbance. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (208SGS536). In this feature unit 208SG, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 208SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (208SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 15-17 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7.

In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 208SGS271 (208SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (208SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (208SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (208SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (208SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 208SGS272 or 208SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (208SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (208SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the received display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol or small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of the 208SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277). Whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in 208SG275. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (208SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (208SGS278) is executed to proceed to 208SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (208SG277; N), the process proceeds to 208SGS279 without executing the process of 208SGS278.

Then, in the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (208SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 15-27 to 15-29, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display in the non-reach variable pattern, and the variable display starts in the normal reach or super reach variable pattern. It is a production that can be performed during the period from the end to the timing of reaching.

After executing the 208SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (208SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (208SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (208SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 208SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (208SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (208SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal to realize variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (208 SGS285).

15-18 to 15-20 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIGS. 15-17. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (208SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (208SGS301; Y). N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (208SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (208SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (208SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (208SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (208SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS306), and 208SGS308. Proceed to. In 208SGS306, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 15-28 and 15-31, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment displays the image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. Then, the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15-23 and 15-31, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005x together with the red effect, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y together with the golden effect. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS307). Proceed to 208SGS308. In 208SGS307, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After the execution of the 208SGS306 or 208SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (208SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (208SGS309, 208SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, in the case of the 208SGS303, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (208SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (208 SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (208SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS3316) is determined, and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS316, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. The presence / absence of execution and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS317), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS317, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS313 (208SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 cuts in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS318), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS318, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (208SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. It is determined whether or not (208SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (208SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined (208SGS325), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS325, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C ( 208SGS326), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS326, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS322 (208SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS328), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS328, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. Whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 329), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS329, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS321 is not 4 (208SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. Is determined (208SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (208SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS333; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS334), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS334, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C ( 208SGS335), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS335, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in the 208SGS331 (208SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS337), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS337, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 338), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS338, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 208SGS330 is not 5 (208SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (208SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (208SGS342), and the processing of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS342, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 208SGS343), 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS343, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

If the variable display result is out of sync with the 208SGS339 (208SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (208SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (208SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (208SGS345), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are executed. In 208SGS345, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (208SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. Whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (208 SGS 346), and the processes of 208 SGS 308 to 208 SGS 310 are executed. In 208SGS346, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ (PS2-5 or PB1-6) in the 208SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4 of the super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (208SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (208SGS354), and 208SGS308. ~ 208 The processing of SGS310 is executed. In 208SGS354, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (208SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (208SGS355), and the processes of 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 are determined. To execute. In 208SGS355, as shown in FIG. 15-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 208SGS351 (208SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the deviation of the variable display result (208SGS356), and 208SGS308 to 208SGS310 Executes the processing of. In 208SGS356, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the variable display result is the lowest (big hit expectation) when the effect is not executed and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expectation of big hit in cut-in production: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the jackpot C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21, 15-22 and 15-24, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution rate, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect-the set value when the per reach γ jackpot / super reach δ jackpot is used. Is 4, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the set value is 5, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the disappointment is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and the pachinko is notified that it is a big hit. It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy in the place where the gaming state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display in the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the gaming interest can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (B) to 15-21 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 208SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself at which the cut-in effect is executed when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern with high expectation of big hits, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature unit 208SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining the <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although a mode in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect during the variable display is changed according to the set value and the variable display result set in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of order, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low jackpot expectation or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 208SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 15-25 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 15-17. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (208SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a big hit or a miss (208SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any of the effect patterns of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (208 SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (208SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364). ). When the stored effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (208SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (208SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (208SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (208SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (208SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (208SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (208SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (208SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (208SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 208SGS365, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the deviation of super reach γ (PA2-4).

As shown in FIGS. 15-26 (C) and 15-30, the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is an effect pattern. The image display device 5 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 208SG005u of the character C together with the golden effect on the image display device 5. The pattern YE-4 is an effect pattern for displaying the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS368, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 208SGS369, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), 50% of the non-execution of the advance notice effect is performed. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Also,
Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (expectation of big hit of notice effect: not execute notice effect <execute in pattern YE-1 <execute in pattern YE-2 <execute in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-26 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 is used as the effect pattern of the notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the advance notice effect). Furthermore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (208SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (208SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 208SGS365, 208SGS368, and 208SGS369 is stored (208SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The production determination process is completed (208SGS372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (208SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 208SGS371 and 208SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect start waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

As described above, by making it possible to determine the execution of the cut-in effect and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 (A) to 15-27 (C), non-reach In the out-of-range fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and in the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach during the variable display in the pattern YE-. It is possible to execute with 1 and pattern YE-2, and in the fluctuation pattern of super reach α off and super reach β off, the advance notice effect is given in the period before reach during the variable display, pattern YE-1 to pattern YE-. It can be executed in 3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-29 (A) and 15-29 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the advance notice effect is performed in the period before the reach YE-1 to 1. The pattern YE-4 can be executed, and the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to the pattern CI-4 in the period after the reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-30 to 15-32. First, as shown in FIGS. 15-30 (A) to 15-30 (E), when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is pattern YE- in the image display device 5. It is executed in any of 1 to pattern YE-4. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 208SG005s of the character A is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2. When the image 208SG005t of the character B is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-3, the image 208SG005u of the character C is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the collective image 208SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the rainbow-colored effect.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 208SG005s, 208SG005t, 208SG005u, 208SG005v the image displayed on the image display device 5 is, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 15-31 (A) to 15-31 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 208SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15-31 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ is reached, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image of the push button 31B, and the player A promotion notification is performed to urge the user to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is pattern CI-1
When the cut-in image 208SG005w is displayed with the blue effect on the image display device 5 and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 208SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5 and cut. When the in-effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 208SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5, and when the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 208SG005y. The cut-in image 208SG005z is displayed with a rainbow effect.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 208SG005w, 208SG005x, 208SG005y, and 208SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (A) and 15-32 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line), the super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (A) and 15-32 (C), when the variable display variation pattern is PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot variation pattern that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-32 (A) and 15-32 (D) to 15-32 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative symbol is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. Battle production) is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of order when executed in the pattern CI-3. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot by executing the resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is out of order, the player sets the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 208SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. The pachinko game is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It can be difficult to identify the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the revival effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 15-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. And can improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-6 and 15-22, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 208SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is also possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing it in YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention to the crab until the variable display is completed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-27 and 15-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In addition, in the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at the timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the game is a big hit and prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 and 15-22, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw attention to the player whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, it is possible to make the player think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B, so the game interest for the variable display result being missed. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. When the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the advance notice effect is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 though the embodiment is exemplified by the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the cut-in effect in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. For this reason, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability and low base state.

In the feature unit 208SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-21, when the variable display is executed in the variation pattern (PB1-5) for executing the resurrection effect, the variation pattern in which the resurrection effect is not executed is executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 208SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 (A) to 15-33 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a revival effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 15 is shown as a modified example 208SG-2. As shown in −34 (A) to 15-34 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 208SG-3. As shown in 15-35 (A) to 15-35 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. When the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1 to 3. In either case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 208SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game for the player, but in this feature unit 208SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-26, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 15-36 (A) to 15-36 (C) as the modified example 208SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed with the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect will be performed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution is decided with pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with low expectation of big hits. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of order, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 15-21 (C) to 15-21 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 15-37 as 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit for a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue playing the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 208SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. At that time, when the gaming state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 208SG-6 as shown in FIG. 15-38. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. In the case of, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, the game interests of these low-determined base state and low-accuracy high-base state are Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 208SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-40 (A) and 15-40 (B) as the modified example 208SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in effect. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. When the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ in this way, a period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, the player can pay attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A ... 1st special symbol display device 4B ... 2nd special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special Variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

A plurality of set values including a game state control means for controlling the game state and an effect control means for controlling the effect, including a disadvantageous set value and an advantageous set value having a higher advantage for the player than the disadvantageous set value. It is a game machine that can set any setting value from among
The game state control means
It is possible to control an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, a special state that is different from the advantageous state, and a special state in which the game value is easily given by the special state.
The effect control means
In the special state, it is possible to control to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes based on the movement of the player.
Depending on the effect mode, it is possible to make the predetermined effect corresponding to the control of the special state different.
further,
A decidable means capable of deciding to control to the advantageous state,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, the suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled in the mode including the specific effect and the mode not including the specific effect,
With
The suggestion effect execution means
When the disadvantage setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect cannot be executed.
When the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means that the advantageous state is controlled, the suggestion effect of the aspect including the specific effect can be executed.
When the suggestion effect is executed, it has a special pattern in which it is once suggested that it is not controlled to the advantageous state and then it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the special pattern is controlled to the advantageous state, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect including the specific effect is higher than the ratio of executing the suggestion effect in the aspect not including the specific effect. A game machine characterized by being low.